SMC Air Cylinder PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 121
At a glance
Powered by AI
The document describes different types of pneumatic cylinders and their specifications, including the C85 and C75 series. It also discusses ordering information, customization options, and safety precautions.

The document describes several types of cylinders including the C85, C85W, C85R, C75, C75W, and C75R series. It provides information on their actions, mounting options, bore sizes, and other specifications.

The document states that customizations can be made to cylinders including changes to rod end shapes, addition of heat resistance, using stainless steel materials, and modifications for low speed operation between 10 to 50 mm/s.

ISO Cylinder Air Cylinder

C85 Series C75 Series


C85 (ISO Standard 6432) Series: ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25
C75 Series: ø32, ø40
RoHS

C85
Part numbers for actuators with mounting brackets,

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


rod end brackets, and auto switches are now available.
As it is no longer necessary to order the bracket and the applicable cylinder
separately, ordering time can be reduced.

Rod end bracket


(Double knuckle joint)

Auto switch (D-M9)

C75
Mounting bracket (Foot)

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Easy fine adjustment of auto switch position
Fine adjustment of the auto switch position is possible by
simply loosening the screw attached to the auto switch.

Transparent switch bracket improves


visibility of indicator LED.
LED color indicator

Fine adjustment of
auto switch

C96
Switch bracket
C96Y C96K

Screw attached to auto switch


C55

Made to Order
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Change of rod end shape: -XA0 to 30


Heat-resistant cylinder (−10 to 150°C): -XB6
Made of stainless steel: -XC6, etc. have been added.

4A
ISO Cylinder C85/C75 Series

Part numbers for actuators with mounting brackets, rod end brackets, and auto switches are now available.
Not necessary to order a bracket for the applicable cylinder separately

Example) CD85N20-40CJ L W -B- M9BW


Mounting bracket Rod end bracket Auto switch
Nil None Nil None Solid state auto switch
D-M9W
L Single foot V Rod end
M Double foot W ∗1 Double knuckle joint Reed auto switch
D-A9
G Flange ∗1 C85 only
Auto switch (D-M9)
U Trunnion
N Clevis Mounting bracket (Foot)

Rod end bracket (Double knuckle joint)

Various mounting bracket options


• Suitable mounting brackets can be selected V: Rod end
for the installation condition.
W∗1: Double knuckle joint
• Improved amount of ∗1 C85 only
mounting freedom G: Rod flange N:
Basic (Integrated clevis)
F:
L(M): Single (Double) foot Boss-cut/Basic

U: Rod trunnion

E:
Double end
boss-cut

Y: G: Head flange
Head cover axial port

L (M): Single (Double) foot

U: Head trunnion

Series Variations
Bore size [mm]
ISO
Type Action Page
Standards
8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40
Double acting,
Single rod 6
Standard Double acting,
ISO 6432 Double rod 17
C85 Series
Single acting,
Single rod 23
Double acting,
Single rod 60
Standard Double acting,
— Double rod 68
C75 Series
Single acting,
Single rod 74
Double acting,
Single rod 37
Non-rotating rod
ISO 6432 C85 Series Single acting,
Single rod 42
Double acting,
Single rod 85
Non-rotating rod

C75 Series Single acting,
Single rod 90
Double acting,
ISO 6432 Direct mount C85 Series Single rod 56
Double acting,
— Direct mount C75 Series Single rod 101
5
ISO Standards
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Single Rod

C85 Series
ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25

C85
How to Order

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Double acting, Single rod C D 85 N 20 40 C J L V B M9BW S
Number of auto switches
Head cover type Accessory*1
Nil 2
N Basic (Integrated clevis) Nil None
S 1
Bore size V Rod end
E Double end boss-cut n n
F Boss-cut/Basic
8 8 mm W Double knuckle joint
10 10 mm *1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories Auto switch
Y Head cover axial port
12 12 mm on page 8 for details of accessories. Nil Without auto switch
Applicable head cover 16 16 mm * Accessory is shipped together with the
* For
 applicable auto switches,
Head cover type 20 20 mm product.
refer to the table below.
Action
N E F Y 25 25 mm
Rubber
Auto switch mounting type*1 * A
 uto switches are shipped
V V V V together with the product.
bumper A Rail mounting
Cylinder stroke [mm]

C75
B Band mounting Made to order
Air cushion V*1 — — — Refer to the next page for
For details, refer to page 7.
standard strokes. *1 The symbol is “Nil” for no magnet.

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


*1 Excluding ø8 Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
Cushion Nil None Head Mounting bracket
Action
Built-in magnet Nil Rubber bumper (Standard) L Single foot cover type L M G U N
Nil None C Air cushion M Double foot N V V V V V
D Built-in magnet G Flange Rubber E V V V V —
Rod boot (ø20, ø25 only) U Trunnion bumper F V — V V —
N Clevis Y V — V V —
Nil Without rod boot
J Nylon tarpaulin (One end) *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/ Air cushion N*1 V V V V V
Accessories on page 8 for details
K Heat-resistant tarpaulin (One end)
of mounting brackets. *1 Excluding ø8
* M
 ounting bracket is shipped together
with the product.
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N M9NV M9N V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P M9PV M9P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B M9BV M9B V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW M9NWV M9NW V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW M9PWV M9PW V V V v —
C96
v
(2-color indicator) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW M9BWV M9BW V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1
C96Y C96K

3-wire (PNP) v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 A96V A96 V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A93V∗2 A93 V V V V — —
C55

No 100 V or less A90V A90 A90V A90 V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,


2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· Nil (Example) M9NW 3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL None··············· N (Example) H7CN
1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
∗ When mounting a band on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) and A79W cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25, the D-M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) cannot be mounted.
6
C85 Series

Specifications

Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25


Type Pneumatic
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating Rubber bumper 0.1 MPa 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa
pressure Air cushion — 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.0 +1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Rubber bumper
Cushion
— Air cushion
Symbol Allowable Rubber bumper 0.02 J 0.03 J 0.04 J 0.09 J 0.27 J 0.4 J
kinetic energy Air cushion — 0.17 J 0.19 J 0.4 J 0.66 J 0.97 J
Double acting, Air cushion
Single rod

Standard Strokes

Bore size Max. stroke*3


Standard stroke [mm]*2*4
[mm] [mm]
8*1 200
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
10
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with 12 400
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
auto switches. 16
20
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 300 1000
25
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting *1 Not available with air cushion.
*2 Other strokes are available on request.
• Operating Range *3 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No. *4 The minimum stroke with air cushion is 25 mm.

Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly


Made to Order
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.)
Cylinder model: CD85N20-50CNW-B-M9BW
Symbol Specifications
-XA Change of rod end shape*1 Basic (Integrated clevis)
-XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)*2, *3 Head cover N: Basic (Integrated clevis)
Mounting bracket N: Clevis
-XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder (–40 to 70°C)*3, *4 Double knuckle joint Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint
-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)*4 Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper *4
* M
 ounting bracket, double knuckle joint, and
-XC6l Made of stainless steel auto switch are shipped together with the
*1 Excludes the ø8 air cushion Clevis product.
*2 Rubber bumper ø10 to ø25 only
*3 Excludes with rod end (Accessory)
Auto switch
*4 Rubber bumper ø20 and ø25 only

Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to
the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation
Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com

B 7
Air Cylinder: Standard
C85 Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Single Rod

Mounting Brackets/Accessories
Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/ Clevis Pin Double
Mounting Rod end Mounting
Accessory Foot Flange Trunnion pivot Clevis pin retaining Rod end knuckle
nut nut nut
bracket ring joint

C85
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (1 pc.) — — — — — —

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — —
Accessory V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — V (1 pc.) —
symbol W Double knuckle joint V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.


Bore size [mm]
Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
8 10 12 16 20 25
Rod end nut C85NT10 C85NT16 C85NT20 C85NT25 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C85SN10 C85SN16 C85SN25 1 mounting nut
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A 1 foot bracket
Foot

C75
C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B 2 foot brackets, 1 mounting nut
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut)
Mounting
Foot
bracket C85L10C C85L16C C85L25C 1 foot bracket, 1 mounting nut

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut)
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25 1 flange
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25 1 trunnion
1 clevis pivot bracket, 1 clevis pin,
Clevis C85C10 C85C16 C85C25
2 pin retaining rings
Rod end KJ4D KJ6D KJ8D KJ10D 1 rod end
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKM4-8 GKM6-12 GKM8-16 GKM10-20 1 double knuckle joint
Floating joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100 JA20-8-125 JA30-10-125 1 floating joint
* Refer to page 16 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Standard Type


Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

20 C85A-20PS Every set includes:


1 rod seal
1 flat washer * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
25 C85A-25PS 1 retaining ring separately) on the sliding parts.

Weights
[g]
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25 C96
38 77 89 179 244
C85N 37
(44) (84) (95) (176) (241)
C96Y C96K

Without magnet C85E 39 40 81 93 185 249


C85F 35 37 71 79 164 227
Basic C85Y 35 37 72 79 165 228
weight 39 78 90 183 248
CD85N 37
(44) (84) (96) (179) (245)
With magnet CD85E 39 41 81 93 188 253
C55

CD85F 35 37 72 80 168 231


CD85Y 36 37 72 80 168 232
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 2.1 2.3 4.1 5.1 8.1 11.3
Foot (1 pc.) C85LlA 20 40 95
Products Order Switch

Foot
Related Made to Auto

C85LlB 55 105 210


Mounting (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut)
bracket Flange Calculation example: C85N20-50NV
C85Fl 12 25 90
O Basic weight··········· 179 g (ø20)
Trunnion C85Tl 20 50 75
O Additional weight···· 8.1 g (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C85Cl 20 40 85 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 85 g
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 179 + 8.1 x 50/10 + 85 + 45 ≈ 350 g
( ): For air cushion

8
C85 Series

Stroke Selection
Relationship between cylinder size and maximum stroke The maximum stroke at which the cylinder can be operated under a lateral load
The below table shows the applicable maximum stroke (in cm units), found The region that does not exceed the bold solid line represents the allowable
by calculation assuming the case where the force generated by the cylin- lateral load in relation to the cylinder of a given stroke length. In the graph,
der itself acts as buckling force on the piston rod, or piston rod and cylinder the range of the broken line shows that the long stroke limit has been ex-
tube. Therefore, it is possible to find the applicable maximum stroke for ceeded. In this region, as a rule, operate the cylinder by providing a guide
each cylinder size using the relationship between the size of the operating along the direction of movement.
pressure and the cylinder support type, regardless of the load ratio.
fR Bushing (Bearing)
[Reference] If it is stopped with the external stopper on the cylinder
extension side, even with a light load, the maximum
generated force of the cylinder will act on the cylinder itself.

[cm] C85 Series: ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16


Applicable maximum stroke 10.0
Operating pressure [MPa]

Mounting
according to buckling strength
Nominal symbol

Support bracket C85


nominal symbol and
schematic diagram 8 10 12 16 20 25
Rod Head
MG

Lateral load applied to the rod end fR [N]


Foot: M 0.3 24 18 36 26 38 48
flange: G flange: G
1.0
W W W 0.5 18 14 27 19 29 36
C85
(Rod
side) 0.7 14 11 22 16 23 30
16
C85
12
0.3 9 6 15 10 15 20
G

C85
10
C85
(Head
side )
0.5 6 4 10 6 10 14
0.1
8
0.7 4 3 8 4 8 11
Rod
Clevis: N 0.3 22 17 35 24 36 46
trunnion: U
N

W W 0.5 16 12 26 18 27 34

0.7 13 10 21 14 22 28
0.01
0.3 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 80 (100)∗1
U

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

(40)∗1 (40)∗1 Cylinder stroke [mm]


Head
trunnion: U
(Rod
side)
0.5 38 30 61 77

0.7 32 25 (40)∗1 35 51 64
W

0.3 22 17 35 24 37 47 C85 Series: ø20, ø25


U

100.0
(Head
side )
0.5 16 12 26 18 27 35

0.7 13 10 21 14 22 28
Rod Head
MG

Foot: M flange: G flange: G 0.3 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (100)∗1 (100)∗1
Lateral load applied to the rod end fR [N]

W W W 0.5 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 89 (100)∗1

( )
Rod
side 0.7 (40)∗1 36 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 74 93
10.0

0.3 33 26 (40)∗1 37 54 69
G

(Head
side )
0.5 25 19 39 27 41 52 C85
25
0.7 20 15 32 22 33 43 C85
20
Rod Head 1.0
MG

Foot: M
flange: G flange: G 0.3 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (100)∗1 (100)∗1

W W 0.5 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (100)∗1 (100)∗1


W
( )
Rod
side 0.7 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 (100)∗1 (100)∗1

0.3 (40)∗1 38 (40)∗1 (40)∗1 79 (100)∗1


G

0.1
(40)∗1 (40)∗1
( )
Head 0.5
side
37 29 60 76 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Cylinder stroke [mm]
700 800 900 1000 1100

0.7 30 23 (40)∗1 34 50 63

∗1 The data in ( ) are limited by max. stroke length.

9
Air Cylinder: Standard
C85 Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Single Rod

Dimensions
Basic (Integrated clevis)
Rubber bumper: Cl85N Bore size Stroke l
(XC + Stroke)

C85
(WH) G1 G2
Width across flats KV
øND h8

øCD H9
Width across flats SW BE BE
EE

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


EE
KK

øND h8

NA
8
øC

Width across
flats K
AM KW U (HR) EW d13
F NA
H S + Stroke F
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
Z + Stroke RR
Without magnet
ZZ + Stroke

Air cushion: Cl85N Bore size Stroke C l Cushion needle Cushion needle
(XC + Stroke) (Width across flats 1.5) (Width across flats 1.5)

C75
WA WA 45° 45°
G1 G2

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


NA
8
S + Stroke
Z + Stroke (HR) EW d13
ZZ + Stroke NA
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
With rod boot (Wh) Without magnet
Width across flats K 8 l 8
øC
øe
(JH)

(JW) KK AM f
h

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
AM BE C CD EE EW F G1 G2 H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND RR S SW U WA (WH) (XC) Z ZZ
size
C96
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 7 5 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 1046 7 6 — 1664 76 86
7 5 46 64 76 86
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12
(5.5) (5.5) 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 (53) 7 6 10.5 16
(71) (83) (93)
C96Y C96K

8 6 50 75 91 105
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 (5.5) (5.5) 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 14 (54) 10 9 9.5 22 (79) (95) (109)
8 6
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17
(5.5) (5.5) 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 13 56 10 9 9.5 22 82 98 111
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 8 G1/8 16 20 8 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 11 62 13 12 13 24 95 115 126
25 22 M22 x 1.5 10 8 G1/8 16 22 8 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 11 65 17 12 13 28 104 126 137
( ): For air cushion
C55

With Rod Boot [mm]


Item h
Bore size Stroke AM C e f K KK
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
Products Order Switch

20 20 8 36 22 6 M8 x 1.25 71 84 96 109 134 159 —


Related Made to Auto

25 22 10 36 22 8 M10 x 1.25 74 87 99 112 137 162 187


Item I (JH) (JW) (Wh)
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 Reference Reference 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 — 23.5 10.5 51 64 76 89 114 139 —
25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 23.5 10.5 52 65 77 90 115 140 165

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

10
C85 Series

Dimensions
Double end boss-cut
Rubber bumper: Cl85E Bore size Stroke l

(WH) G1
Width across flats KV G2
øND h8

Width across
flats SW BE BE
EE EE
KK

øND h8

NA
8
øC

Width across
flats K
KW
(HR) NA
AM F
H S + Stroke F Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + Stroke Without magnet

With rod boot


Width across flats K (Wh)
8 l 8
øC
øe
(JH)

(JW) KK AM f
h

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE C EE F G1 G2 H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND S SW (WH) ZZ
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 5 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 46 7 16 86
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 5 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 46 7 16 86
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 50 10 22 105
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 56 10 22 111
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 20 8 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 62 13 24 126
25 22 M22 x 1.5 10 G1/8 22 8 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 65 17 28 137

With Rod Boot [mm]


Item h
Stroke
AM C e f K KK
Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 20 8 36 22 6 M8 x 1.25 71 84 96 109 134 159 —
25 22 10 36 22 8 M10 x 1.25 74 87 99 112 137 162 187

Item I (JH) (JW) (Wh)


Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 Reference Reference 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 — 23.5 10.5 51 64 76 89 114 139 —
25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 23.5 10.5 52 65 77 90 115 140 165

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

11
Air Cylinder: Standard
C85 Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Single Rod

Dimensions
Boss-cut/Basic, Head cover axial port
Rubber bumper: Cl85F/Y Bore size Stroke l
(WH) G1 G2
Width across flats KV

C85
øND h8

Width across flats SW BE


EE EE

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


KK

8
øC

Width across
flats K
KW (HR) (HR)
AM F Head cover Boss-cut/Basic
H S + Stroke axial port
Z + Stroke Rail mounting (A)

NA

NA

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
NA NA
Head cover Boss-cut/Basic
axial port
Band mounting (B)
With rod boot Without magnet
Width across flats K (Wh)
8 l 8
øC
øe
(JH)

(JW) KK AM f
h

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE C EE F G1 G2 H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND S SW (WH) Z C96
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 5 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 46 7 16 74
C96Y C96K

10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 5 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 46 7 16 74


12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 50 10 22 88
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 50 10 22 88
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 20 8 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 62 13 24 106
25 22 M22 x 1.5 10 G1/8 22 8 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 65 17 28 115

With Rod Boot


C55

[mm]
Item h
Stroke
AM C e f K KK
Bore size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 20 8 36 22 6 M8 x 1.25 71 84 96 109 134 159 —
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

25 22 10 36 22 8 M10 x 1.25 74 87 99 112 137 162 187

Item I (JH) (JW) (Wh)


Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 Reference Reference 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 — 23.5 10.5 51 64 76 89 114 139 —
25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 23.5 10.5 52 65 77 90 115 140 165

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

12
C85 Series

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl85Nl lL


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT
NH

(XS)
LT

2 x øAB

Double foot: Cl85Nl lM


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT 4 x øAB

UR
NH

AV
LT

TR
LS + Stroke
US
(XL + Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore
size
AB AO AV LS LT NH TRJS14 UR US (W) (XL) (XS)
8 4.5 5 11 68 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 73 23.8
10 4.5 5 11 68 (75) 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 73 (80) 23.8
12 5.5 6 14 78 (82) 4 20 32 33 42 18 86 (90) 32
16 5.5 6 14 84 4 20 32 33 42 18 92 32
20 6.6 8 17 96 5 25 40 42 54 19 103 36
25 6.6 8 17 99 5 25 40 42 54 23 110 40
( ): For air cushion

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

13
Air Cylinder: Standard
C85 Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Single Rod

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod flange: Cl85Nl lG


(With mounting bracket)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
(W) FT

Head flange: Cl85Nl lG


(With mounting bracket)

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
UF
TF
FT FB
(WL + Stroke) UR

 [mm]
Bore
FBH13 FT TF UF UR (W) (WL) C96
size
8 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 65.2
C96Y C96K

10 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 65.2 (72.2)


12 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 76 (80)
16 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 82
20 6.6 5 50 66 40 19 91
25 6.6 5 50 66 40 23 98
( ): For air cushion
C55

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


Products Order Switch

(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).


Related Made to Auto

14
C85 Series

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod trunnion: Cl85Nl lU (With mounting bracket)

TT
(XV)

Head trunnion: Cl85Nl lU


(With mounting bracket)

TM
TZ
TT TD
(XZ + Stroke) UW
 [mm]
Bore
size
TDe8 TM TT TZ UW (XV) (XZ)
8 4 26 6 38 20 13 65
10 4 26 6 38 20 13 65 (72)
12 6 38 8 58 25 18 76 (80)
16 6 38 8 58 25 18 82
20 6 46 8 66 32 20 90
25 6 46 8 66 32 24 97
( ): For air cushion

Clevis: Cl85Nl lN
(With mounting bracket)
(XC + Stroke) AE
øCD

NH

LT

AO 2 x øAB
AU
TR
LG
 [mm]
Bore
size
AB AE AO AU CDH9 LG LT NH TR (XC)
8 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 64
10 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 64 (71)
12 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 75 (79)
16 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 82
20 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 95
25 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 104
( ): For air cushion

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

15
C85 Series
Dimensions of Accessories
Rod End Double Knuckle Joint
ødH7

C85
45
°
b1
b3

d3
d

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


øf

α° α° l

(k)
l3

øj
g
b

e
c
(l)
d6

d7

C75
[mm] [mm]
Bore size Part no. b1 b3 dH7 d6 d7 h l l3 d3 a° Bore size Part no. b c d f g j k e l
8 KJ4D   8 6.0  5 18 11 27 10 10 M4 x 0.7 13 8 GKM4-8  4  8 16  4  8  8 11 M4 x 0.7 21

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


10 KJ4D   8 6.0  5 18 11 27 10 10 M4 x 0.7 13 10 GKM4-8  4  8 16  4  8  8 11 M4 x 0.7 21
12 KJ6D   9 6.75  6 20 13 30 12 11 M6 x 1 13 12 GKM6-12  6 12 24  6 12 10 18 M6 x 1 31
16 KJ6D   9 6.75  6 20 13 30 12 11 M6 x 1 13 16 GKM6-12  6 12 24  6 12 10 18 M6 x 1 31
20 KJ8D 12 9  8 24 16 36 16 13 M8 x 1.25 14 20 GKM8-16  8 16 32  8 16 14 23 M8 x 1.25 42
25 KJ10D 14 10.5 10 28 19 43 20 15 M10 x 1.25 13 25 GKM10-20 10 20 40 10 20 18 27 M10 x 1.25 52

Floating Joint: JA
In the case of dimension
M without C
M
U

øD
U

C96
F
B G
C96Y C96K

H C E P B E

[mm]
C55

M Max. operating tension


Max. screw-in Allowable
Bore size Part no.Nominal A B C D E F G H and compression
Pitch depth P eccentricity U power [kN]
thread dia.
8, 10 JA10-4-070  4 0.7 26 9 10 12 1.5 4 4  7 5.5 0.5 0.054
Products Order Switch

12, 16 JA15-6-100  6 1 34.5 12.5 14 16 2 6 5 10 7 0.5 0.123


Related Made to Auto

20 JA20-8-125  8 1.25 44 17.5 — 21 4.5 7 7 13 8 0.5 1.1


25 JA30-10-125 10 1.25 49.5 19.5 — 24 5 8 8 17 9 0.5 2.5

16
ISO Standards
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Double Rod

C85W Series
ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25

How to Order

Double acting, Double rod C D 85WE 20 40 C J L V B M9BW S


Built-in magnet Bore size Accessory*1 Number of auto switches
Nil None 8 8 mm Nil None Nil 2
D Built-in magnet 10 10 mm V Rod end S 1
12 12 mm W Double knuckle joint n n
16 16 mm
*1 R  efer to Mounting Brackets/ Auto switch
20 20 mm Accessories on page 19 for details
25 25 mm of accessories.
Nil Without auto switch
* Accessory is shipped together with * F
 or applicable auto switches,
Cylinder stroke [mm] the product. refer to the table below.
Refer to the next page for * A
 uto switches are shipped
standard strokes. Auto switch mounting type*1 together with the product.
A Rail mounting Made to order
Cushion B Band mounting For details, refer to page 18.
Nil Rubber bumper (Standard) *1 The symbol is “Nil” for no magnet.
C Air cushion
Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
Rod boot (ø20, ø25 only) Nil None Mounting bracket
Action
L Single foot L M G U
Nil Without rod boot
M Double foot Rubber
J Nylon tarpaulin (One end) V V V V
G Flange bumper
K Heat-resistant tarpaulin (One end)
U Trunnion
JJ Nylon tarpaulin (Both ends) Air cushion*1 V V V V
KK Heat-resistant tarpaulin (Both ends) *1 R  efer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on
page 19 for details of mounting brackets. *1 Excluding ø8
* Mounting bracket is shipped together with
the product.
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N M9NV M9N V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P M9PV M9P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B M9BV M9B V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW M9NWV M9NW V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW M9PWV M9PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW M9BWV M9BW V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 A96V A96 V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A93V∗2 A93 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A90V A90 V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· Nil (Example) M9NW 3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL None··············· N (Example) H7CN
1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
∗ When mounting a band on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) and A79W cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25, the D-M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) cannot be mounted.
17
Air Cylinder: Standard
C85W Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Double Rod

Specifications

Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25


Type Pneumatic
Action Double acting, Double rod

C85
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Min. operating Rubber bumper 0.1 MPa 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa
pressure Air cushion — 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.0 +1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Symbol Rubber bumper
Cushion
— Air cushion
Rubber bumper
Allowable Rubber bumper 0.02 J 0.03 J 0.04 J 0.09 J 0.27 J 0.4 J
kinetic energy Air cushion — 0.17 J 0.19 J 0.4 J 0.66 J 0.97 J

C75
Standard Strokes
Air cushion

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Bore size Max. stroke*3
Standard stroke [mm]*2*4
[mm] [mm]
8*1
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100 100
10
12
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200 200
16
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with 20
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 300 500
auto switches. 25
*1 Not available with air cushion.
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position
*2 Other strokes are available on request.
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height *3 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting *4 The minimum stroke with air cushion is 25 mm.
• Operating Range
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.
Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Made to Order Cylinder model: CD85WE20-50MW-B-M9BW


(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.)
Symbol Specifications Double knuckle joint Mounting bracket M: Double foot C96
-XA Change of rod end shape*1 Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint
-XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)*2 Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
C96Y C96K

-XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder (–40 to 70°C)*3 * Mounting


 bracket, double knuckle joint, and
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper*3 Double foot auto switch are shipped together with the
Made of stainless steel*4 product.
-XC6l
Auto switch
*1 Excludes the ø8 air cushion
*2 Rubber bumper ø10 to ø25 only
*3 Rubber bumper ø20 and ø25 only
C55

*4 Rubber bumper only

Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to


the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation
Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com

18
C85W Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/Accessory Double
Mounting nut Rod end nut Mounting nut Foot Flange Trunnion Rod end
knuckle joint

L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — V (1 pc.) — — — —


Mounting
M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — —
bracket
symbol
G Flange V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — V (1 pc.) — — —
U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — V (1 pc.) — —
Accessory V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — V (1 pc.) —
symbol W Double knuckle joint V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
8 10 12 16 20 25
Rod end nut C85NT10 C85NT16 C85NT20 C85NT25 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C85SN10 C85SN16 C85SN25 1 mounting nut
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A 1 foot bracket
Foot
Mounting (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B 2 foot brackets, 1 mounting nut
bracket
Foot
C85L10C C85L16C C85L25C 1 foot bracket, 1 mounting nut
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut)
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25 1 flange
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25 1 trunnion
Rod end KJ4D KJ6D KJ8D KJ10D 1 rod end
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKM4-8 GKM6-12 GKM8-16 GKM10-20 1 double knuckle joint
Floating joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100 JA20-8-125 JA30-10-125 1 floating joint
* Refer to page 16 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Standard Type


Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

20 C85A-20PS Every set includes: * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
1 rod seal separately) on the sliding parts.
1 flat washer When replacing seals for a double rod actuator, order 2 sets
25 C85A-25PS 1 retaining ring of replacement parts.

Weights
[g]
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
46 96 106 205 289
Without magnet C85WE 43
Basic (51) (97) (106) (205) (291)
weight 46 96 106 208 293
With magnet CD85WE 46
(52) (97) (107) (208) (294)
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 3.0 3.3 6.4 7.4 12.0 17.5
Foot (1 pc.) C85LlA 20 40 95
Foot
Mounting (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C85LlB 55 105 210
bracket Calculation example: C85WE20-50MV
Flange C85Fl 12 25 90 O Basic weight··········· 205 g (ø20)
Trunnion C85Tl 20 50 75 O Additional weight···· 12.0 g (at 10 mm stroke)
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Cylinder stroke····························50 mm
O Mounting bracket: Double foot····210 g
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end····················45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 205 + 12.0 x 50/10 + 210 + 45 = 520 g
( ): For air cushion

19
Air Cylinder: Standard
C85W Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Double Rod

Dimensions
Double end boss-cut
Cl85WE Bore size Stroke l
(WH) G1
Width across flats KV G1 (WH + Stroke)

C85
øND h8

Width across
Width across
BE BE flats SW

øND h8
flats SW EE EE

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


KK
KK

NA
8
Width across Width across
øC

øC
flats K flats K
KW
(HR) NA
AM F F AM
H S + Stroke H + Stroke Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + 2 x Stroke Without magnet

Air cushion: Cl85WE Bore size Stroke C l Cushion needle Cushion needle
(Width across flats 1.5) (Width across flats 1.5)
WA WA
45° 45°
G1 G1

C75
NA

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


8
S + Stroke (HR)
NA
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
Without magnet
With rod boot Width across flats K (Wh)
8 l 8
øC
øe
(JH)

(JW) KK AM f
h

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE C EE F G1 H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND S SW WA (WH) ZZ
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 48 {54} 7 — 16 104 {110} C96
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 (5.5) 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 48 (53) 7 10.5 16 104 (109)
C96Y C96K

12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 (5.5) 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 52 (54) 10 9.5 22 128 (130)
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 (5.5) 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 52 (54) 10 9.5 22 128 (130)
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 20 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 62 13 13 24 150
25 22 M22 x 1.5 10 G1/8 22 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 65 17 13 28 165
( ): For air cushion { }: For built-in magnet

With Rod Boot


C55

[mm]
Item h
AM C e f K KK
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 20 8 36 22 6 M8 x 1.25 71 84 96 109 134 159 —
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

25 22 10 36 22 8 M10 x 1.25 74 87 99 112 137 162 187

Item I (JH) (JW) (Wh)


Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 50 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 Reference Reference 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
20 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 — 23.5 10.5 51 64 76 89 114 139 —
25 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 23.5 10.5 52 65 77 90 115 140 165

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

20
C85W Series

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl85WEl lL


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT
NH

(XS)
LT

2 x øAB

Double foot: Cl85WEl lM


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT

UR
4 x øAB
NH

AV
LT

TR
LS + Stroke US
(XL + Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore
size
AB AO AV LS LT NH TRJS14 UR US (W) (XL) (XS)
8 4.5 5 11 70 {76} 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 75 {81} 23.8
10 4.5 5 11 70 (75) 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 75 (80) 23.8
12 5.5 6 14 80 (82) 4 20 32 33 42 18 88 (90) 32
16 5.5 6 14 80 (82) 4 20 32 33 42 18 88 (90) 32
20 6.6 8 17 96 5 25 40 42 54 19 103 36
25 6.6 8 17 99 5 25 40 42 54 23 110 40
( ): For air cushion { }: For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

21
Air Cylinder: Standard
C85W Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Double Rod

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Flange: Cl85WEl lG
(With mounting bracket)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
UF
TF
(W) FT FB
UR

 [mm]
Bore
size
FBH13 FT TF UF UR (W)
8 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8
10 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8

C75
12 5.5 4 40 52 30 18
16 5.5 4 40 52 30 18
20 6.6 5 50 66 40 19

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


25 6.6 5 50 66 40 23

Trunnion: Cl85WEl lU
(With mounting bracket)

TM
TZ

TT TD
(XV) UW
C96


C96Y C96K

[mm]
Bore
size
TDe8 TM TT TZ UW (XV)
8 4 26 6 38 20 13
10 4 26 6 38 20 13
12 6 38 8 58 25 18
16 6 38 8 58 25 18
C55

20 6 46 8 66 32 20
25 6 46 8 66 32 24
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

22
ISO Standards
Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

C85 Series
ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25

How to Order

Single acting, Spring return/extend C D 85 N 20 40 S L V B M9BW S


Built-in magnet Accessory*1 Number of auto switches
Nil None Nil None Nil 2
D Built-in magnet V Rod end S 1
W Double knuckle joint n n
Head cover type *1 R  efer to Mounting Brackets/ Made to order
Accessories on page 25 for details of
N Basic (Integrated clevis) For details, refer to page 24.
Bore size accessories.
E Double end boss-cut
8 8 mm * Accessory is shipped together with Auto switch
F Boss-cut/Basic
the product.
Y Head cover axial port 10 10 mm Nil Without auto switch
12 12 mm Auto switch mounting type*1 * F
 or applicable auto switches,
Applicable head cover 16 16 mm refer to the table below.
A Rail mounting
Head cover type 20 20 mm * A
 uto switches are shipped
Action B Band mounting
N E F Y 25 25 mm together with the product.
Single acting, *1 The symbol is “Nil” for no magnet.
V V V V
Spring return Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
Single acting,
V V V — Nil None Head Mounting bracket
Spring extend Cylinder stroke [mm] Action
L Single foot cover type L M G U N
Refer to the next page for
standard strokes. M Double foot N V V V V V
G Flange Single acting, E V V V V —
U Trunnion Spring return F V — V V —
Action
N Clevis Y V — V V —
S Single acting, Spring return N V V V V V
T Single acting, Spring extend *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on Single acting,
E V V V V —
page 25 for details of mounting brackets. Spring extend
* M
 ounting bracket is shipped together with the F V — V V —
product.
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N M9NV M9N V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P M9PV M9P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B M9BV M9B V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW M9NWV M9NW V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW M9PWV M9PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW M9BWV M9BW V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 A96V A96 V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A93V∗2 A93 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A90V A90 V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 3 m··················
L (Example) M9NWL None··············· N (Example) H7CN
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
∗ When mounting a band on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) and A79W cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25, the D-M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) cannot be mounted.
23
ISO Standards Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C85 Series

Specifications
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
Type Pneumatic
Action Single acting, Single rod
Fluid Air

C85
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.22 MPa 0.18 MPa 0.13 MPa Return: 0.18 MPa, Extend: 0.23 MPa

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Symbol
Stroke length tolerance   0  mm
+1.0
  0  mm
+1.4

Single acting: Spring return, Rubber bumper Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable kinetic energy 0.02 J 0.03 J 0.04 J 0.09 J 0.27 J 0.4 J

Standard Strokes
Single acting: Spring extend, Rubber bumper

Bore size [mm] Standard stroke [mm]*1 Max. stroke [mm]


8
10 10, 25, 50 50
12

C75
16
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with 20 10, 25, 50, 100, 150 150
auto switches. 25

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position *1 Other strokes are available on request. (Request based production)
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting Spring Retracting Force
• Operating Range Spring Return [N]
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No. Spring force
Bore Standard
10 25 50 100 150
size stroke
[mm] [mm] Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
Made to Order extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.) 8 4.4 4.0 4.4 3.4 4.4 2.5 — — — —
10 10, 25, 50 6.3 5.7 6.3 4.9 6.3 3.5 — — — —
Symbol Specifications
12 7.2 6.6 7.2 5.8 7.2 4.4 — — — —
-XA Change of rod end shape
16 13.2 12.1 13.2 10.3 13.2 7.5 13.2 7.5 13.2 7.5
-XC6l Made of stainless steel 10, 25, 50,
20 100, 150
21.6 18.6 21.6 16.7 21.6 11.8 39.2 9.8 39.2 9.8
25 27.5 25.3 27.5 22.1 27.5 16.7 47.1 13.7 47.1 15.7

Precautions Spring Extend


Bore Standard
Spring force
[N]

10 25 50 100 150
Be sure to read this before handling the size stroke
[mm] [mm] Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
products. Refer to page 219 for safety retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended
instructions. For actuator and auto switch 8 5.3 3.9 5.3 3.1 5.3 2.7 — — — —
precautions, refer to the “Handling 10 10, 25, 50 6.0 4.8 6.0 4.0 6.0 3.5 — — — — C96
Precautions for SMC Products” and the 12 6.6 5.6 6.6 4.9 6.6 4.5 — — — —
16 14.7 11.3 14.7 9.2 14.7 7.9 14.7 7.9 14.7 7.9
C96Y C96K

“Operation Manual” on the SMC website: 10, 25, 50,


http://www.smcworld.com 20 100, 150
39.2 33.0 39.2 23.5 39.2 9.8 39.2 9.8 39.2 9.8
25 47.1 40.4 47.1 30.4 47.1 13.7 47.1 13.7 47.1 15.7

Caution
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly
way that rotational torque would be
C55

applied to the piston rod.


Cylinder model: CD85N20-50SNW-B-M9BW
To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded
portion at the tip of the piston rod, make sure to Basic (Integrated clevis)
Products Order Switch

retract the piston rod entirely, and place a wrench Head cover N: Basic (Integrated clevis)
Related Made to Auto

over the flat portion of the rod that protrudes. Mounting bracket N: Clevis
Double knuckle joint Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint
Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
tightening torque from being applied to the non-
rotating guide. * M
 ounting bracket, double knuckle joint, and
auto switch are shipped together with the
Clevis product.

Auto switch

24
C85 Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/ Clevis Pin Double
Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting
Foot Flange Trunnion pivot Clevis pin retaining Rod end knuckle
nut nut nut
bracket ring joint
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (1 pc.) — — — — — —
symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — —
Accessory V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — V (1 pc.) —
symbol W Double knuckle joint V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
8 10 12 16 20 25
Rod end nut C85NT10 C85NT16 C85NT20 C85NT25 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C85SN10 C85SN16 C85SN25 1 mounting nut
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A 1 foot bracket
Foot
C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B 2 foot brackets, 1 mounting nut
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut)
Mounting
bracket Foot C85L10C C85L16C C85L25C 1 foot bracket, 1 mounting nut
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut)
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25 1 flange
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25 1 trunnion
1 clevis pivot bracket, 1 clevis pin,
Clevis C85C10 C85C16 C85C25
2 pin retaining rings
Rod end KJ4D KJ6D KJ8D KJ10D 1 rod end
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKM4-8 GKM6-12 GKM8-16 GKM10-20 1 double knuckle joint
Floating joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100 JA20-8-125 JA30-10-125 1 floating joint
* Refer to page 16 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Standard Type (Only for single acting, spring extend)
Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

20 C85A-20PS Every set includes: * W


 hen replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
1 rod seal separately) on the sliding parts.
1 flat washer In the single acting, spring return type, there is no rod seal so
25 C85A-25PS 1 retaining ring it is not possible to replace any seals.

25
ISO Standards Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C85 Series

Weights
Single Acting, Spring Return (S) [g]
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
C85Nl-lS 36 40 80 98 185 249
C85El-lS 38 42 83 102 190 254
1 to 50 mm stroke
C85Fl-lS 35 38 74 88 170 232

C85
C85Yl-lS 35 38 74 88 170 233
C85Nl-lS — — — 119 248 340

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Without C85El-lS — — — 123 253 345
51 to 100 mm stroke
magnet C85Fl-lS — — — 109 233 323
C85Yl-lS — — — 109 234 324
C85Nl-lS — — — 140 283 390
C85El-lS — — — 144 288 395
101 to 150 mm stroke
C85Fl-lS — — — 131 268 373
Basic C85Yl-lS — — — 131 268 374
weight CD85Nl-lS 38 42 86 102 188 253
CD85El-lS 40 44 89 106 193 258
1 to 50 mm stroke
CD85Fl-lS 37 40 80 90 173 236
CD85Yl-lS 37 40 80 92 174 237
CD85Nl-lS — — — 123 251 344
With CD85El-lS — — — 127 257 349
51 to 100 mm stroke
magnet CD85Fl-lS — — — 113 236 326
CD85Yl-lS — — — 113 237 328
CD85Nl-lS — — — 144 286 394

C75
CD85El-lS — — — 148 291 399
101 to 150 mm stroke
CD85Fl-lS — — — 135 271 376

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


CD85Yl-lS — — — 135 272 378
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 2.1 2.3 4.1 5.1 8.1 11.3
Foot (1 pc.) C85LlA 20 40 95
Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C85LlB 55 105 210
Mounting Calculation example: C85N20-50SNV
Flange C85Fl 12 25 90
bracket O Basic weight··········· 185 g (ø20)
Trunnion C85Tl 20 50 75
O Additional weight···· 8.1 g (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C85Cl 20 40 85 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 85 g
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 185 + 8.1 x 50/10 + 85 + 45 ≈ 356 g

Single Acting, Spring Extend (T) [g]


Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
C85Nl-lT 43 47 90 116 205 274
1 to 50 mm stroke C85El-lT 45 49 93 120 209 279
C85Fl-lT 41 46 84 106 189 257
C85Nl-lT — — — 146 229 309
Without
51 to 100 mm stroke C85El-lT — — — 150 234 314
magnet
C85Fl-lT — — — 137 214 291
C85Nl-lT — — — 177 256 344
101 to 150 mm stroke C85El-lT — — — 181 260 349
Basic C85Fl-lT — — — 167 240 327 C96
weight CD85Nl-lT 45 49 93 120 208 278
C96Y C96K

1 to 50 mm stroke CD85El-lT 47 51 96 124 213 283


CD85Fl-lT 43 48 87 110 193 261
CD85Nl-lT — — — 150 233 312
With
51 to 100 mm stroke CD85El-lT — — — 154 238 317
magnet
CD85Fl-lT — — — 141 218 295
CD85Nl-lT — — — 181 259 348
101 to 150 mm stroke CD85El-lT — — — 184 264 353
C55

CD85Fl-lT — — — 171 244 331


Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 2.1 2.3 4.1 5.1 8.1 11.3
Foot (1 pc.) C85LlA 20 40 95
Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C85LlB 55 105 210
Calculation example: C85N20-50TNV
Products Order Switch

Mounting
Related Made to Auto

Flange C85Fl 12 25 90
bracket O Basic weight··········· 205 g (ø20)
Trunnion C85Tl 20 50 75
O Additional weight···· 8.1 g (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C85Cl 20 40 85 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 85 g
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 205 + 8.1 x 50/10 + 85 + 45 ≈ 376 g

26
C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Basic (Integrated clevis)
Cl85N Bore size Stroke S l
(XC + Stroke)
Width across (WH)
flats SW KW G2

øCD H9
KK BE EE BE
øND h8

øND h8

NA
8
Width across
øC

flats K (HR)
Width across flats KV U EW d13
AM F NA
H S + Stroke F
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
Z + Stroke RR
Without magnet
ZZ + Stroke

Double end boss-cut


Cl85E Bore size Stroke S l
Width across flats KV (WH)
G2
øND h8

Width across
flats SW BE
EE BE
KK
øND h8

NA
8
øC

Width across
flats K
KW
AM F (HR) NA
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
Without magnet

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE C CD EE EW F G2 H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND RR SW U (WH)
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 5 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 5 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 14 10 9 22
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 13 10 9 22
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 8 G1/8 16 20 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 11 13 12 24
25 22 M22 x 1.5 10 8 G1/8 16 22 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 11 17 12 28

Bore S (XC) Z ZZ
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 46 (52) — — 64 (70) — — 76 (82) — — 86 (92) — —
10 46 (50) — — 64 (68) — — 76 (80) — — 86 (90) — —
12 50 (53.5) — — 75 (78.5) — — 91 (94.5) — — 105 (108.5) — —
16 56 (59.5) 71.5 (75) 87 (90.5) 82 (85.5) 97.5 (101) 113 (116.5) 98 (101.5) 113.5 (117) 129 (132.5) 111 (114.5) 126.5 (130) 142 (145.5)
20 62 112 137 95 145 170 115 165 190 126 176 201
25 65 113.5 138.5 104 152.5 177.5 126 174.5 199.5 137 185.5 210.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

27
ISO Standards Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Boss-cut/Basic, Head cover axial port
Cl85F/Y Bore size Stroke S l

(WH)

C85
Width across
flats SW KW G2
BE EE

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


KK
øND h8

8
Width across
øC

flats K
Width across flats KV (HR) (HR)
AM F
H S + Stroke Head cover Boss-cut/Basic
Z + Stroke axial port
Rail mounting (A)

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
NA

NA
NA NA

Head cover Boss-cut/Basic


axial port
Band mounting (B)
Without magnet

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE C EE F G2 H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND SW (WH)
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 5 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 5 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
C96
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22
C96Y C96K

16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 6 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22


20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 20 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 13 24
25 22 M22 x 1.5 10 G1/8 22 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 17 28

Bore S Z
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
C55

8 46 (52) — — 74 (80) — —
10 46 (50) — — 74 (78) — —
12 50 (53.5) — — 88 (91.5) — —
Products Order Switch

16 50 (53.5) 65.5 (69) 81 (84.5) 88 (91.5) 103.5 (107) 119 (122.5)


Related Made to Auto

20 62 112 137 106 156 181


25 65 113.5 138.5 115 163.5 188.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

28
C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl85Nl lSL


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT
NH

(XS)
LT

2 x øAB

Double foot: Cl85Nl lSM


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT 4 x øAB

UR
NH

AV
LT

TR
LS + Stroke US
(XL + Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV LT NH TRJs14 UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
68 73
8 4.5 5 11
(74)
— — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 23.8
(79)
— —

68 73
10 4.5 5 11
(72)
— — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 23.8
(77)
— —

78 86
12 5.5 6 14
(81.5)
— — 4 20 32 33 42 18 32
(89.5)
— —

84 99.5 115 92 107.5 123


16 5.5 6 14
(87.5) (103) (118.5)
4 20 32 33 42 18 32
(95.5) (111) (126.5)
20 6.6 8 17 96 146 171 5 25 40 42 54 19 36 103 153 178
25 6.6 8 17 96 147.5 172.5 5 25 40 42 54 23 40 110 158.5 183.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

29
ISO Standards Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod flange: Cl85Nl lSG


(With mounting bracket)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
(W) FT

Head flange: Cl85Nl lSG


(With mounting bracket)

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
UF
TF
FT FB
(WL + Stroke) UR

 [mm]
Bore (WL)
size
FBH13 FT TF UF UR (W)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 65.2 (71.2) — —
10 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 65.2 (69.2) — — C96
12 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 76 (79.5) — —
16 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 82 (85.5) 97.5 (101) 113 (116.5)
C96Y C96K

20 6.6 5 50 66 40 19 91 141 166


25 6.6 5 50 66 40 23 98 146.5 171.5
( ): For built-in magnet
C55

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

30
C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod trunnion: Cl85Nl lSU (With mounting bracket)

TT
(XV)

Head trunnion: Cl85Nl lSU


(With mounting bracket)

TM
TZ
TT TD
(XZ + Stroke) UW
 [mm]
Bore (XZ)
size
TDe8 TM TT TZ UW (XV)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4 26 6 38 20 13 65 (71) — —
10 4 26 6 38 20 13 65 (69) — —
12 6 38 8 58 25 18 76 (79.5) — —
16 6 38 8 58 25 18 82 (85.5) 97.5 (101) 113 (116.5)
20 6 46 8 66 32 20 90 140 165
25 6 46 8 66 32 24 97 145.5 170.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Clevis: Cl85Nl lSN


(With mounting bracket)
(XC + Stroke) AE
øCD

NH

LT

AO 2 x øAB AU
TR
LG
 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB AE AO AU CDH9 LG LT NH TR
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 64 (70) — —
10 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 64 (68) — —
12 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 75 (78.5) — —
16 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 82 (85.5) 97.5 (101) 113 (116.5)
20 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 95 145 170
25 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 104 152.5 177.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

31
ISO Standards Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend


Basic (Integrated clevis)
Cl85N Bore size Stroke T l

(XC + 2 x Stroke)

C85
(WH + Stroke) G
Width across
øND h8

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


øCD H9
flats SW EE BE
KK

øND h8

NA
8
øC

Width across flats K U (HR) EW d13


KW
Width across flats KV
AM F NA
H + Stroke S + Stroke F
Z + 2 x Stroke RR Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + 2 x Stroke Without magnet

Double end boss-cut

C75
Cl85E Bore size Stroke T l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(WH + Stroke) G
Width across flats KV
øND h8

Width across
flats SW BE
EE BE
KK
øND h8

NA
8
øC

Width across flats K KW


AM F (HR) NA
H + Stroke S + Stroke F
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Without magnet

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE C CD EE EW F G H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND RR SW U (WH)
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 7 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16 C96
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 7 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 8 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 14 10 9 22
C96Y C96K

16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 8 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 13 10 9 22


20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 8 G1/8 16 20 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 11 13 12 24
25 22 M22 x 1.5 10 8 G1/8 16 22 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 11 17 12 28

Bore S (XC) Z ZZ
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
C55

8 64.5 (70.5) — — 82.5 (88.5) — — 94.5 (100.5) — — 104.5 (110.5) — —


10 64.5 (68.5) — — 82.5 (86.5) — — 94.5 (98.5) — — 104.5 (108.5) — —
12 70 (73.5) — — 95 (98.5) — — 111 (114.5) — — 125 (128.5) — —
Products Order Switch

16 75 (78.5) 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5) 117 (120.5) 143 (146.5) 169 (172.5) 130 (133.5) 156 (159.5) 182 (185.5)
Related Made to Auto

20 87 112 137 120 145 170 140 165 190 151 176 201
25 88.5 113.5 138.5 127.5 152.5 177.5 149.5 174.5 199.5 160.5 185.5 210.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

32
C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend


Boss-cut/Basic
Cl85F Bore size Stroke T l

(WH + Stroke) G
KW
Width across
øND h8
flats SW EE
KK BE

NA
8
øC

Width across
flats K Width across flats KV
AM F (HR) NA

H + Stroke S + Stroke Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)


Without magnet
Z + 2 x Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE C EE F G H (HR) K KK KV KW NA ND SW (WH)
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 28 13.4 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 12 7 28 14.2 — M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 17 8 38 14.2 5 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 20 8 44 17 6 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 13 24
25 20 M22 x 1.5 10 G1/8 22 8 50 20 8 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 17 28

Bore S Z
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 64.5 (70.5) — — 92.5 (98.5) — —
10 64.5 (68.5) — — 92.5 (96.5) — —
12 70 (73.5) — — 108 (111.5) — —
16 69 (72.5) 95 (98.5) 121 (124.5) 107 (110.5) 133 (136.5) 159 (162.5)
20 87 112 137 131 156 181
25 88.5 113.5 138.5 138.5 163.5 188.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

33
ISO Standards Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl85Nl lTL


(With mounting bracket)
(W + Stroke) LT

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
NH

LT

2 x øAB
(XS + Stroke)

Double foot: Cl85Nl lTM


(With mounting bracket)

C75
(W + Stroke) LT

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


4 x øAB

UR
AV TR
LS + Stroke US
(XL + 2 x Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV LT NH TRJs14 UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 5 11 86.5 (92.5) — — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 23.8 91.5 (97.5) — —
10 4.5 5 11 86.5 (90.5) — — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 23.8 91.5 (95.5) — —
12 5.5 6 14 98 (101.5) — — 4 20 32 33 42 18 32 106 (109.5) — —
16 5.5 6 14 103 (106.5) 129 (132.5) 155 (158.5) 4 20 32 33 42 18 32 111 (114.5) 137 (140.5) 163 (166.5)
20 6.6 8 17 121 146 171 5 25 40 42 54 19 36 128 153 178 C96
25 6.6 8 17 122.5 147.5 172.5 5 25 40 42 54 23 40 133.5 158.5 183.5
C96Y C96K

( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

34
C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod flange: Cl85Nl lTG


(With mounting bracket)

(W + Stroke) FT

Head flange: Cl85Nl lTG


(With mounting bracket)

UF
TF
FT FB
(WL + 2 x Stroke) UR

 [mm]
Bore (WL)
size
FBH13 FT TF UF UR (W)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 83.7 (89.7) — —
10 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 83.7 (87.7) — —
12 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 96 (99.5) — —
16 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5)
20 6.6 5 50 66 40 19 116 141 166
25 6.6 5 50 66 40 23 121.5 146.5 171.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

35
ISO Standards Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C85 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod trunnion: Cl85Nl lTU


(With mounting bracket)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
TT
(XV + Stroke)

Head trunnion: Cl85Nl lTU


(With mounting bracket)

TM
TZ

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
TT TD
(XZ + 2 x Stroke) UW
 [mm]
Bore (XZ)
size
TDe8 TM TT TZ UW (XV)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4 26 6 38 20 13 83.5 (89.5) — —
10 4 26 6 38 20 13 83.5 (87.5) — —
12 6 38 8 58 25 18 96 (99.5) — —
16 6 38 8 58 25 18 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5)
20 6 46 8 66 32 20 115 140 165
25 6 46 8 66 32 24 120.5 145.5 170.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Clevis: Cl85Nl lTN


(With mounting bracket)
(XC + 2 x Stroke) AE
øCD

C96
C96Y C96K
NH

LT

AO
2 x øAB AU
TR
LG
C55

 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB AE AO AU CDH9 LG LT NH TR
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 82.5 (88.5) — —
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

10 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 82.5 (86.5) — —


12 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 95 (98.5) — —
16 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5)
20 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 120 145 170
25 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 127.5 152.5 177.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

36
ISO Standards
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Single Rod

C85K Series
ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25

How to Order

Double acting, Single rod C D 85K N 20 40 L V B M9BW S


Built-in magnet Number of auto switches
Auto switch mounting type*1 Nil 2
Nil None
D Built-in magnet A Rail mounting S 1
B Band mounting n n
*1 T
 he symbol is “Nil”
Head cover type for no magnet. Auto switch
N Basic (Integrated clevis) Nil Without auto switch
E Double end boss-cut Bore size Accessory*1
* F
 or applicable auto switches,
F Boss-cut/Basic 8 8 mm Nil None refer to the table below.
Y Head cover axial port 10 10 mm V Rod end * A
 uto switches are shipped
12 12 mm W Double knuckle joint together with the product.
Applicable head cover
16 16 mm *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories
Head cover type 20 20 mm Made to order
Action on page 39 for details of accessories.
N E F Y 25 25 mm * Accessory is shipped together with the For details, refer to page 38.
Rubber product.
V V V V
bumper
Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
Nil None Head Mounting bracket
Action
L Single foot cover type L M G U N
Cylinder stroke [mm] N
M Double foot V V V V V
Refer to the next page for
G Flange Rubber E V V V V —
standard strokes.
U Trunnion bumper F V — V V —
N Clevis Y V — V V —
*1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on page 39 for details of mounting brackets.
* Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N M9NV M9N V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P M9PV M9P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B M9BV M9B V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW M9NWV M9NW V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW M9PWV M9PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW M9BWV M9BW V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 A96V A96 V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A93V∗2 A93 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A90V A90 V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
∗ When mounting a band on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) and A79W cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25, the D-M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) cannot be mounted.
37
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Single Rod

Specifications

Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25


Type Pneumatic
Action Double acting, Single rod

C85
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Min. operating pressure 0.1 MPa 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.0 +1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable kinetic energy 0.02 J 0.03 J 0.04 J 0.09 J 0.27 J 0.4 J
Symbol
Non-rotating accuracy ±1.5° ±1° ±0.7°
Rubber bumper

Standard Strokes

C75
Bore size Max. stroke*2
Standard stroke [mm]*1
[mm] [mm]

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with 8
auto switches. 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100 100
10
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position 12
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200 200
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height 16
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting 20
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 300 1000
• Operating Range 25
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No. *1 Other strokes are available on request.
*2 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).

Made to Order
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.)
Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly
Symbol Specifications
-XA Change of rod end shape Cylinder model: CD85KN20-50NW-B-M9BW
-XC6l Made of stainless steel
Basic (Integrated clevis)
Head cover N: Basic (Integrated clevis)
Mounting bracket N: Clevis
Double knuckle joint Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.

* M
 ounting bracket, double knuckle joint, and
C96
auto switch are shipped together with the
Clevis product.
C96Y C96K

Auto switch

Precautions
C55

Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to
the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com

38
C85K Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/ Clevis Pin Double
Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting
Foot Flange Trunnion pivot Clevis pin retaining Rod end knuckle
nut nut nut
bracket ring joint
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (1 pc.) — — — — — —
symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — —
Accessory V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — V (1 pc.) —
symbol W Double knuckle joint V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
8 10 12 16 20 25
Rod end nut C85NT10 C85NT16 C85NT20 C85NT25 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C85SN10 C85SN16 C85SN25 1 mounting nut
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A 1 foot bracket
Foot
C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B 2 foot brackets, 1 mounting nut
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut)
Mounting
bracket Foot C85L10C C85L16C C85L25C 1 foot bracket, 1 mounting nut
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut)
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25 1 flange
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25 1 trunnion
1 clevis pivot bracket, 1 clevis pin,
Clevis C85C10 C85C16 C85C25
2 pin retaining rings
Rod end KJ4D KJ6D KJ8D KJ10D 1 rod end
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKM4-8 GKM6-12 GKM8-16 GKM10-20 1 double knuckle joint
Floating joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100 JA20-8-125 JA30-10-125 1 floating joint
* Refer to page 16 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Non-rotating Rod Type (K)


Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

20 C85K-20PS Every set includes:


1 rod seal
1 flat washer * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
25 C85K-25PS 1 retaining ring separately) on the sliding parts.

Weights
[g]
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
C85KN 39 41 82 95 189 257
C85KE 41 43 86 98 194 262
Without magnet
C85KF 37 39 77 85 174 240
Basic C85KY 37 39 77 85 175 241
weight CD85KN 39 41 83 95 193 261
CD85KE 41 43 86 99 198 266
With magnet
CD85KF 37 39 77 85 178 244
CD85KY 37 39 78 85 178 245
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 2.3 2.5 4.5 5.5 8.7 12.2
Foot (1 pc.) C85LlA 20 40 95
Foot
C85LlB 55 105 210
Mounting (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut)
bracket Flange C85Fl 12 25 90 Calculation example: C85KN20-50NV
Trunnion C85Tl 20 50 75 O Basic weight··········· 189 g (ø20)
Clevis C85Cl 20 40 85 O Additional weight···· 8.7 g (at 10 mm stroke)
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 85 g
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 189 + 8.7 x 50/10 + 85 + 45 ≈ 363 g
39
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Single Rod

Dimensions
Basic (Integrated clevis)
Rubber bumper: Cl85KN Bore size Stroke l

C85
(XC + Stroke)
Width across Width across (WH) G1 G2
flats SW flats KV

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


øND h8

øCD H9
KK BE EE EE BE
KA

øND h8

NA
8
Rod EW d13
AM KW U (HR)
section NA
F
H S + Stroke F
Z + Stroke RR Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + Stroke Without magnet

C75
Double end boss-cut
Rubber bumper: Cl85KE Bore size Stroke l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(WH) G1
Width across Width across G2
flats SW flats KV
øND h8

KK BE EE EE BE
KA

øND h8

NA
8

Rod KW
section AM F (HR) NA
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
Without magnet

C96
Dimensions [mm]
Bore
C96Y C96K

size
AM BE CD EE EW F G1 G2 H (HR) KA KK KV KW NA ND RR S SW U (WH) (XC) Z ZZ
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 7 5 28 13.4 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 46 7 6 16 64 76 86
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 7 5 28 14.2 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 46 7 6 16 64 76 86
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 8 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 14 50 10 9 22 75 91 105
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 8 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 13 56 10 9 22 82 98 111
20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 16 20 8 8 44 17 8.2 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 11 62 13 12 24 95 115 126
C55

20
25 22 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 16 22 8 8 50 20 10.2 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 11 65 17 12 28 104 126 137
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Refer to pages 13 to 15 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of the mounting
brackets, and refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories
(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

40
C85K Series

Dimensions
Boss-cut/Basic, Head cover axial port
Rubber bumper: Cl85KF/Y Bore size Stroke l
Without magnet/Built-in magnet

(WH) G1
G2
øND h8
Width across flats KV
Width across flats SW BE EE EE
KK
KA

8
Rod (HR) (HR)
KW
section
AM F
H S + Stroke
Z + Stroke Head cover Boss-cut/Basic
axial port

Rail mounting (A)

NA

NA
NA NA

Head cover Boss-cut/Basic


axial port

Band mounting (B)


Without magnet

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE EE F G1 G2 H (HR) KA KK KV KW NA ND S SW (WH) Z
8 12 M12 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 12 7 5 28 13.4 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 46 7 16 74
10 12 M12 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 12 7 5 28 14.2 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 46 7 16 74
12 16 M16 x 1.5 M5 x 0.8 17 8 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 50 10 22 88
16 16 M16 x 1.5 M5 x 0.8 17 8 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 50 10 22 88
20 20 M22 x 1.5 G1/8 20 8 8 44 17 8.2 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 62 13 24 106
25 22 M22 x 1.5 G1/8 22 8 8 50 20 10.2 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 65 17 28 115

Refer to pages 13 to 15 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of the mounting
brackets, and refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories
(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

41
ISO Standards
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

C85K Series
ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25

C85
How to Order

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Single acting, Spring return/extend C D 85K N 20 40 S L V B M9BW S
Built-in magnet Accessory*1 Number of auto switches
Nil None Nil None Nil 2
D Built-in magnet V Rod end S 1
W Double knuckle joint n n

Head cover type *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/ Auto switch


Accessories on page 44 for Nil Without auto switch
N Basic (Integrated clevis)
details of accessories.
E Double end boss-cut * Accessory is shipped together * F
 or applicable auto switches,
F Boss-cut/Basic Bore size with the product. refer to the table below.
Y Head cover axial port 8 8 mm * A
 uto switches are shipped
10 10 mm Auto switch mounting type*1 together with the product.
Applicable head cover

C75
12 12 mm A Rail mounting Made to order
Head cover type
Action 16 16 mm B Band mounting For details, refer to page 43.
N E F Y
20 20 mm *1 The symbol is “Nil” for no magnet.

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Single acting,
Spring return
V V V V 25 25 mm Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
Single acting, Nil None Head Mounting bracket
V V V — Cylinder stroke [mm] Action
Spring extend L Single foot cover type L M G U N
Refer to the next page for M Double foot N V V V V V
standard strokes.
G Flange Single acting, E V V V V —
U Trunnion Spring return F V — V V —
Action N Clevis Y V — V V —
S Single acting, Spring return *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on N V V V V V
T Single acting, Spring extend Single acting,
page 44 for details of mounting brackets. Spring extend
E V V V V —
* M
 ounting bracket is shipped together with F V — V V —
the product.
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N M9NV M9N V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P M9PV M9P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B M9BV M9B V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW M9NWV M9NW V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW M9PWV M9PW V V V v —
C96
v
(2-color indicator) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW M9BWV M9BW V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1
C96Y C96K

3-wire (PNP) v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 A96V A96 V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A93V∗2 A93 V V V V — —
C55

No 100 V or less A90V A90 A90V A90 V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,


2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL None··············· N (Example) H7CN
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
∗ When mounting a band on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12, the D-A9l(V) and A79W cannot be mounted.
∗ When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25, the D-M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) cannot be mounted.
42
C85K Series

Specifications
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
Type Pneumatic
Action Single acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.22 MPa 0.18 MPa 0.13 MPa Return: 0.18 MPa, Extend: 0.23 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Symbol Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Stroke length tolerance   0  mm
+1.0
  0  mm
+1.4

Single acting: Spring return, Single acting: Spring extend, Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Rubber bumper Rubber bumper Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable kinetic energy 0.02 J 0.03 J 0.04 J 0.09 J 0.27 J 0.4 J
Non-rotating accuracy ±1.5° ±1° ±0.7°

Standard Strokes
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with
auto switches. Bore size [mm] Standard stroke [mm]*1 Max. stroke [mm]
8
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position
10 10, 25, 50 50
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
12
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting 16
• Operating Range 20 10, 25, 50, 100, 150 150
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No. 25
*1 Other strokes are available on request. (Request based production)

Made to Order Spring Retracting Force


(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.)
Symbol Specifications Spring Return [N]
-XA Change of rod end shape Spring force
Bore Standard
10 25 50 100 150
-XC6l Made of stainless steel size stroke
[mm] [mm] Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted
Precautions 8
10 10, 25, 50
4.4
6.3
4.0
5.7
4.4
6.3
3.4
4.9
4.4
6.3
2.5
3.5








Be sure to read this before handling the 12 7.2 6.6 7.2 5.8 7.2 4.4 — — — —
products. Refer to page 219 for safety 16 13.2 12.1 13.2 10.3 13.2 7.5 13.2 7.5 13.2 7.5
10, 25, 50,
20 21.6 18.6 21.6 16.7 21.6 11.8 39.2 9.8 39.2 9.8
instructions. For actuator and auto switch 100, 150
25 27.5 25.3 27.5 22.1 27.5 16.7 47.1 13.7 47.1 15.7
precautions, refer to the “Handling
Precautions for SMC Products” and the
Spring Extend [N]
Spring force
“Operation Manual” on the SMC website: Bore Standard
10 25 50 100 150
http://www.smcworld.com size stroke
[mm] [mm] Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended
Caution 8 5.3 3.9 5.3 3.1 5.3 2.7 — — — —
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a 10 10, 25, 50 6.0 4.8 6.0 4.0 6.0 3.5 — — — —
way that rotational torque would be 12 6.6 5.6 6.6 4.9 6.6 4.5 — — — —
applied to the piston rod. 16 14.7 11.3 14.7 9.2 14.7 7.9 14.7 7.9 14.7 7.9
10, 25, 50,
If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating 20 100, 150
39.2 33.0 39.2 23.5 39.2 9.8 39.2 9.8 39.2 9.8
guide will become deformed, thus affecting the 25 47.1 40.4 47.1 30.4 47.1 13.7 47.1 13.7 47.1 15.7
non-rotating accuracy.
Refer to the table below for the approximate
values of the allowable range of rotational torque.
Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly
Allowable rotational ø8 ø10 ø12 ø16 ø20 ø25
torque (N·m or less) 0.02 0.04 0.2 0.25 Cylinder model: CD85KN20-50SNW-B-M9BW
To screw a bracket or a nut onto the threaded
portion at the tip of the piston rod, make sure to Basic (Integrated clevis)
retract the piston rod entirely, and place a wrench Head cover N: Basic (Integrated clevis)
over the flat portion of the rod that protrudes. Mounting bracket N: Clevis
Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the Double knuckle joint Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint
tightening torque from being applied to the non- Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
rotating guide.
* M
 ounting bracket, double knuckle joint, and
auto switch are shipped together with the
Clevis product.

Auto switch

43
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/ Clevis Pin Double
Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting
Foot Flange Trunnion pivot Clevis pin retaining Rod end knuckle
nut nut nut
bracket ring joint

C85
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — — — —

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (1 pc.) — — — — — —
symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — —
Accessory V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — V (1 pc.) —
symbol W Double knuckle joint V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
8 10 12 16 20 25
Rod end nut C85NT10 C85NT16 C85NT20 C85NT25 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C85SN10 C85SN16 C85SN25 1 mounting nut

C75
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A 1 foot bracket
Foot
C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B 2 foot brackets, 1 mounting nut

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut)
Mounting
bracket Foot C85L10C C85L16C C85L25C 1 foot bracket, 1 mounting nut
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut)
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25 1 flange
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25 1 trunnion
1 clevis pivot bracket, 1 clevis pin,
Clevis C85C10 C85C16 C85C25
2 pin retaining rings
Rod end KJ4D KJ6D KJ8D KJ10D 1 rod end
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKM4-8 GKM6-12 GKM8-16 GKM10-20 1 double knuckle joint
Floating joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100 JA20-8-125 JA30-10-125 1 floating joint
* Refer to page 16 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Non-rotating Rod Type (K) (Only for single acting, spring extend)
Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

20 C85K-20PS Every set includes: * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
1 rod seal separately) on the sliding parts.
1 flat washer In the single acting, spring return type, there is no rod seal so
25 C85K-25PS 1 retaining ring it is not possible to replace any seals.

C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

44
C85K Series

Weights
Single Acting, Spring Return (S) [g]
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
C85KNl-lS 42 47 92 116 228 309
C85KEl-lS 44 49 95 120 233 314
1 to 50 mm stroke
C85KFl-lS 40 46 86 106 213 292
C85KYl-lS 41 46 86 107 214 293
C85KNl-lS — — — 154 264 361
Without C85KEl-lS — — — 157 269 366
51 to 100 mm stroke
magnet C85KFl-lS — — — 144 249 344
C85KYl-lS — — — 144 250 345
C85KNl-lS — — — 191 302 415
C85KEl-lS — — — 194 307 420
101 to 150 mm stroke
C85KFl-lS — — — 181 287 397
Basic C85KYl-lS — — — 181 287 398
weight CD85KNl-lS 44 49 94 120 231 313
CD85KEl-lS 46 51 98 124 237 318
1 to 50 mm stroke
CD85KFl-lS 43 48 89 110 216 296
CD85KYl-lS 43 48 89 110 217 297
CD85KNl-lS — — — 158 268 365
With CD85KEl-lS — — — 161 273 370
51 to 100 mm stroke
magnet CD85KFl-lS — — — 148 252 348
CD85KYl-lS — — — 148 253 349
CD85KNl-lS — — — 195 305 418
CD85KEl-lS — — — 198 310 423
101 to 150 mm stroke
CD85KFl-lS — — — 185 290 401
CD85KYl-lS — — — 185 291 402
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 2.3 2.5 4.5 5.5 8.7 12.2
Foot (1 pc.) C85LlA 20 40 95
Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C85LlB 55 105 210
Mounting Calculation example: C85KN20-50SNV
Flange C85Fl 12 25 90
bracket O Basic weight··········· 228 g (ø20)
Trunnion C85Tl 20 50 75
O Additional weight···· 8.7 g (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C85Cl 20 40 85 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 85 g
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 228 + 8.7 x 50/10 + 85 + 45 ≈ 402 g

Single Acting, Spring Extend (T) [g]


Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
C85KNl-lT 43 49 93 119 214 285
1 to 50 mm stroke C85KEl-lT 45 51 96 123 218 290
C85KFl-lT 42 47 87 109 199 268
C85KNl-lT — — — 149 238 319
Without
51 to 100 mm stroke C85KEl-lT — — — 153 243 324
magnet
C85KFl-lT — — — 140 223 302
C85KNl-lT — — — 180 265 355
101 to 150 mm stroke C85KEl-lT — — — 184 269 360
Basic C85KFl-lT — — — 170 249 338
weight CD85KNl-lT 46 51 96 123 217 289
1 to 50 mm stroke CD85KEl-lT 48 53 99 127 222 294
CD85KFl-lT 44 49 90 113 202 272
CD85KNl-lT — — — 154 242 323
With
51 to 100 mm stroke CD85KEl-lT — — — 157 247 328
magnet
CD85KFl-lT — — — 144 227 306
CD85KNl-lT — — — 184 268 359
101 to 150 mm stroke CD85KEl-lT — — — 188 273 364
CD85KFl-lT — — — 174 253 341
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 2.3 2.5 4.5 5.5 8.7 12.2
Foot (1 pc.) C85LlA 20 40 95
Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C85LlB 55 105 210
Mounting Calculation example: C85KN20-50TNV
Flange C85Fl 12 25 90
bracket O Basic weight··········· 214 g (ø20)
Trunnion C85Tl 20 50 75
O Additional weight···· 8.7 g (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C85Cl 20 40 85 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 85 g
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 214 + 8.7 x 50/10 + 85 + 45 ≈ 388 g

45
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Basic (Integrated clevis)
Cl85KN Bore size Stroke S l

(XC + Stroke)

C85
(WH)
Width across flats SW KW G2

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


øCD H9
KK BE EE BE
KA

øND h8

øND h8

NA
8
Rod section Width across flats KV U (HR) EW d13
AM F NA
H S + Stroke F
Z + Stroke RR Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + Stroke Without magnet

C75
Double end boss-cut
Cl85KE Bore size Stroke S l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(WH)
øND h8

Width across flats KV


G2
Width across flats SW BE
EE BE
KK
KA

øND h8

NA
8

Rod section
KW
AM F (HR) NA
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
Without magnet

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE CD EE EW F G2 H (HR) KA KK KV KW NA ND RR SW U (WH) C96
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 5 28 13.4 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16
C96Y C96K

10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 5 28 14.2 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16


12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 14 10 9 22
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 13 10 9 22
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 16 20 8 44 17 8.2 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 11 13 12 24
25 22 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 16 22 8 50 20 10.2 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 11 17 12 28
C55

Bore S (XC) Z ZZ
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 56 (62) — — 74 (80) — — 86 (92) — — 96 (102) — —
10 56 (60) — — 74 (78) — — 86 (90) — — 96 (100) — —
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

12 60 (63.5) — — 85 (88.5) — — 101 (104.5) — — 115 (118.5) — —


16 66 (69.5) 92 (95.5) 118 (121.5) 92 (95.5) 118 (121.5) 144 (147.5) 108 (111.5) 134 (137.5) 160 (163.5) 121 (124.5) 147 (150.5) 173 (176.5)
20 87 112 137 120 145 170 140 165 190 151 176 201
25 88.5 113.5 138.5 127.5 152.5 177.5 149.5 174.5 199.5 160.5 185.5 210.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

46
C85K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Boss-cut/Basic, Head cover axial port
Cl85KF/Y Bore size Stroke S l

(WH)
Width across flats SW KW G2
KK BE EE
øND h8
KA

8
Rod section (HR) (HR)
Width across flats KV
AM F
H S + Stroke Head cover Boss-cut/Basic
Z + Stroke axial port

Rail mounting (A)

NA

NA
NA NA

Head cover Boss-cut/Basic


axial port

Band mounting (B)


Without magnet

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE EE F G2 H (HR) KA KK KV KW NA ND SW (WH)
8 12 M12 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 12 5 28 13.4 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
10 12 M12 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 12 5 28 14.2 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
12 16 M16 x 1.5 M5 x 0.8 17 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22
16 16 M16 x 1.5 M5 x 0.8 17 6 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22
20 20 M22 x 1.5 G1/8 20 8 44 17 8.2 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 13 24
25 22 M22 x 1.5 G1/8 22 8 50 20 10.2 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 17 28

Bore S Z
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 56 (62) — — 84 (90) — —
10 56 (60) — — 84 (88) — —
12 60 (63.5) — — 98 (101.5) — —
16 60 (63.5) 86 (89.5) 112 (115.5) 98 (101.5) 124 (127.5) 150 (153.5)
20 87 112 137 131 156 181
25 88.5 113.5 138.5 138.5 163.5 188.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

47
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl85KNl lSL


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
NH

(XS)
LT

2 x øAB

C75
Double foot: Cl85KNl lSM
(With mounting bracket)

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(W) LT 4 x øAB

UR
NH

AV
LT

TR
LS + Stroke
US
(XL + Stroke) AO

 [mm] C96
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV LT NH TRJs14 UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
C96Y C96K

78 83
8 4.5 5 11
(84)
— — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8
(89)
— — 23.8

78 83
10 4.5 5 11
(82)
— — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8
(87)
— — 23.8

88 96
12 5.5 6 14
(91.5)
— — 4 20 32 33 42 18
(99.5)
— — 32
C55

94 120 146 102 128 154


16 5.5 6 14
(97.5) (123.5) (149.5)
4 20 32 33 42 18
(105.5) (131.5) (157.5)
32

20 6.6 8 17 121 146 171 5 25 40 42 54 19 128 153 178 36


25 6.6 8 17 122.5 147.5 172.5 5 25 40 42 54 23 133.5 158.5 183.5 40
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

48
C85K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod flange: Cl85KNl lSG


(With mounting bracket)

(W) FT

Head flange: Cl85KNl lSG


(With mounting bracket)

UF
TF
FT FB
(WL + Stroke) UR

 [mm]
Bore (WL)
size
FBH13 FT TF UF UR (W)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 75.2 (81.2) — —
10 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 75.2 (79.2) — —
12 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 86 (89.5) — —
16 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 92 (95.5) 118 (121.5) 144 (147.5)
20 6.6 5 50 66 40 19 116 141 166
25 6.6 5 50 66 40 23 121.5 146.5 171.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

49
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod trunnion: Cl85KNl lSU (With mounting bracket)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
TT
(XV)

Head trunnion: Cl85KNl lSU


(With mounting bracket)

TM
TZ

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
TT TD
(XZ + Stroke) UW

 [mm]
Bore (XZ)
size
TDe8 TM TT TZ UW (XV)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4 26 6 38 20 13 75 (81) — —
10 4 26 6 38 20 13 75 (79) — —
12 6 38 8 58 25 18 86 (89.5) — —
16 6 38 8 58 25 18 92 (95.5) 118 (121.5) 144 (147.5)
20 6 46 8 66 32 20 115 140 165
25 6 46 8 66 32 24 120.5 145.5 170.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Clevis: Cl85KNl lSN


(With mounting bracket) (XC + Stroke) AE
øCD

C96
NH

C96Y C96K
LT

AO 2 x øAB AU
TR
LG
C55

 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB AE AO AU CDH9 LG LT NH TR
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 74 (80) — —
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

10 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 74 (78) — —


12 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 85 (88.5) — —
16 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 92 (95.5) 118 (121.5) 144 (147.5)
20 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 120 145 170
25 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 127.5 152.5 177.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

50
C85K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend


Basic (Integrated clevis)
Cl85KN Bore size Stroke T l

(XC + 2 x Stroke)
(WH + Stroke) G

øCD H9
øND h8
Width across flats SW EE BE
KK
KA

øND h8

NA
8
Rod U (HR) EW d13
Width across flats KV KW
section NA
AM F
H + Stroke S + Stroke F
Z + 2 x Stroke RR
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Without magnet

Double end boss-cut


Cl85KE Bore size Stroke T l

(WH + Stroke) G
Width across flats KV
øND h8

Width across flats SW BE EE BE


KK
KA

øND h8

NA
8
Rod KW
section (HR) NA
AM F
H + Stroke S + Stroke F
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Without magnet

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE CD EE EW F G H (HR) KA KK KV KW NA ND RR SW U (WH)
8 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 7 28 13.4 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16
10 12 M12 x 1.25 4 M5 x 0.8 8 12 7 28 14.2 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 10 7 6 16
12 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 8 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 14 10 9 22
16 16 M16 x 1.5 6 M5 x 0.8 12 17 8 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 13 10 9 22
20 20 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 16 20 8 44 17 8.2 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 11 13 12 24
25 22 M22 x 1.5 8 G1/8 16 22 8 50 20 10.2 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 11 17 12 28

Bore S (XC) Z ZZ
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 64.5 (70.5) — — 82.5 (88.5) — — 94.5 (100.5) — — 104.5 (110.5) — —
10 64.5 (68.5) — — 82.5 (86.5) — — 94.5 (98.5) — — 104.5 (108.5) — —
12 70 (73.5) — — 95 (98.5) — — 111 (114.5) — — 125 (128.5) — —
16 75 (78.5) 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5) 117 (120.5) 143 (146.5) 169 (172.5) 130 (133.5) 156 (159.5) 182 (185.5)
20 87 112 137 120 145 170 140 165 190 151 176 201
25 88.5 113.5 138.5 127.5 152.5 177.5 149.5 174.5 199.5 160.5 185.5 210.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

51
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend


Boss-cut/Basic
Cl85KF Bore size Stroke T l

C85
(WH + Stroke) G

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


KW
Width across
flats SW øND h8 EE
BE
KK

NA
KA

8
Rod
section Width across flats KV
AM F (HR) NA

H + Stroke S + Stroke Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)


Without magnet
Z + 2 x Stroke

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AM BE EE F G H (HR) KA KK KV KW NA ND SW (WH)
8 12 M12 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 12 7 28 13.4 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
10 12 M12 x 1.25 M5 x 0.8 12 7 28 14.2 4.2 M4 x 0.7 19 6 15 12 7 16
12 16 M16 x 1.5 M5 x 0.8 17 8 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22
16 16 M16 x 1.5 M5 x 0.8 17 8 38 14.2 6.2 M6 x 1 24 8 18.3 16 10 22
20 20 M22 x 1.5 G1/8 20 8 44 17 8.2 M8 x 1.25 32 11 24 22 13 24
25 20 M22 x 1.5 G1/8 22 8 50 20 10.2 M10 x 1.25 32 11 30 22 17 28

Bore S Z
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 64.5 (70.5) — — 92.5 (98.5) — —
10 64.5 (68.5) — — 92.5 (96.5) — —
12 70 (73.5) — — 108 (111.5) — —
16 69 (72.5) 95 (98.5) 121 (124.5) 107 (110.5) 133 (136.5) 159 (162.5)
20 87 112 137 131 156 181
25 88.5 113.5 138.5 138.5 163.5 188.5
C96
( ): For built-in magnet
C96Y C96K

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

52
C85K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl85KNl lTL


(With mounting bracket)
(W + Stroke) LT
NH

LT

2 x øAB
(XS + Stroke)

Double foot: Cl85KNl lTM


(With mounting bracket)

4 x øAB

UR
AV
LS + Stroke TR
(XL + 2 x Stroke) AO US

 [mm]
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV LT NH TRJs14 UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
86.5 91.5
8 4.5 5 11
(92.5)
— — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 23.8
(97.5)
— —

86.5 91.5
10 4.5 5 11
(90.5)
— — 3.2 16 25 26 35 12.8 23.8
(95.5)
— —

98 106
12 5.5 6 14
(101.5)
— — 4 20 32 33 42 18 32
(109.5)
— —

103 129 155 111 137 163


16 5.5 6 14
(106.5) (132.5) (158.5)
4 20 32 33 42 18 32
(114.5) (140.5) (166.5)
20 6.6 8 17 121 146 171 5 25 40 42 54 19 36 128 153 178
25 6.6 8 17 122.5 147.5 172.5 5 25 40 42 54 23 40 133.5 158.5 183.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

53
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
C85K Series
ISO Standards
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod flange: Cl85KNl lTG


(With mounting bracket)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
(W + Stroke) FT

Head flange: Cl85KNl lTG

C75
(With mounting bracket)

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


UF
TF
FT FB
(WL + 2 x Stroke) UR

 [mm] C96
Bore (WL)
size
FBH13 FT TF UF UR (W)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
C96Y C96K

8 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 83.7 (89.7) — —


10 4.5 3.2 30 40 22 12.8 83.7 (87.7) — —
12 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 96 (99.5) — —
16 5.5 4 40 52 30 18 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5)
20 6.6 5 50 66 40 19 116 141 166
25 6.6 5 50 66 40 23 121.5 146.5 171.5
C55

( ): For built-in magnet


Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

54
C85K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod trunnion: Cl85KNl lTU


(With mounting bracket)

TT
(XV + Stroke)

Head trunnion: Cl85KNl lTU


(With mounting bracket)

TM
TZ
TT TD
(XZ + 2 x Stroke) UW
 [mm]
Bore (XZ)
size
TDe8 TM TT TZ UW (XV)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4 26 6 38 20 13 83.5 (89.5) — —
10 4 26 6 38 20 13 83.5 (87.5) — —
12 6 38 8 58 25 18 96 (99.5) — —
16 6 38 8 58 25 18 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5)
20 6 46 8 66 32 20 115 140 165
25 6 46 8 66 32 24 120.5 145.5 170.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Clevis: Cl85KNl lTN


(With mounting bracket)
(XC + 2 x Stroke) AE
øCD

NH

LT

AO 2 x øAB AU
TR
LG
 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB AE AO AU CDH9 LG LT NH TR
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150
8 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 82.5 (88.5) — —
10 4.5 8.1 1.5 13.1 4 20 2.5 24 12.5 82.5 (86.5) — —
12 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 95 (98.5) — —
16 5.5 12.1 2 18.5 6 25 3.2 27 15 101 (104.5) 127 (130.5) 153 (156.5)
20 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 120 145 170
25 6.6 16.1 4 24.1 8 32 4 30 20 127.5 152.5 177.5
( ): For built-in magnet

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

55
ISO Standards
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount
Double Acting, Single Rod

C85R Series
ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20, ø25

C85
How to Order

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Double acting, Single rod C D 85R A F 20 40 V B M9BW S
Built-in magnet
Nil None Number of auto
D Built-in magnet switches
Nil 2
Type S 1
A Bottom side mounting n n
B*1 Front side mounting
*1 ø20, ø25 only. Made to order
For details, refer to page 57.
Head cover type
F Boss-cut/Basic
Auto switch

C75
Y Head cover axial port
Nil Without auto switch
* F
 or applicable auto switches,
Bore size

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


refer to the table below.
8 8 mm * A
 uto switches are shipped
Cylinder stroke [mm] together with the product.
10 10 mm
Refer to the next page for
12 12 mm standard strokes.
16 16 mm Auto switch mounting type*1
20 20 mm Accessory*1 B Band mounting
25 25 mm Nil None *1 The symbol is “Nil” for no magnet.
V Rod end
W Double knuckle joint
*1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories
on page 58 for details of accessories.
* A
 ccessory is shipped together with the
product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW V V V v — v C96
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
C96Y C96K

2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW V V V v — v —


Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
Reed auto switch

— 5V — A96V A96 V — V — — — IC circuit —


Yes (NPN equivalent)
C55

Grommet 100 V A93V∗2 A93 V V V V — — —


——
No 100 V or less A90V A90 V — V — — — IC circuit
12 V Relay,
Yes 2-wire 24 V — — C73C V — V V V — —
PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C V — V V V — IC circuit
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — V — V — — — —


∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (Only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
∗ D-A9l(V) cannot be mounted on ø8, ø10, and ø12.
56
C85R Series

Specifications

Square rod cover makes direct Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25


mounting possible Type Pneumatic
Space saving Action Double acting, Single rod
Because it is a directly mounted type without using Fluid Air
brackets, its overall length is shorter, and its installation Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
pitch can be made smaller. Thus, the space that is Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
required for installation has been dramatically reduced. Min. operating pressure 0.1 MPa 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa
2 mounting types Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
Front side mounting and bottom side mounting available temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
to suit your applications. Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.0 +1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable kinetic energy 0.02 J 0.03 J 0.04 J 0.09 J 0.27 J 0.4 J

Standard Strokes

Bore size Max. stroke*2


Standard stroke [mm]*1
[mm] [mm]
8 200
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
10 400
12
400
16
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160
20
1000
25
*1 Other strokes are available on request.
*2 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).

Bottom side mounting Front side mounting Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Symbol Cylinder model: CD85RAF20-50W-B-M9BW


Double acting, Single rod
Double knuckle joint
Mounting A: Bottom side mounting
Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint
Bottom side mounting
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.

* D
 ouble knuckle joint and auto switch are
shipped together with the product.

Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with


auto switches.
Auto switch
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting
• Operating Range
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.
Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to
the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation
Made to Order
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.) Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com
Symbol Specifications
-XA Change of rod end shape
-XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)*1, *2
-XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder (–40 to 70°C)*1, *2
-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)*1
-XC6A Made of stainless steel*1
*1 ø20, ø25 only
*2 Excludes with rod end (Accessory)
A 57
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount
C85R Series
ISO Standards
Double Acting, Single Rod

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Accessory (shipped together)


Mounting bracket/Accessory
Rod end nut Rod end Double knuckle joint
Accessory V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) —
symbol W

C85
Double knuckle joint V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.)

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Description Contents
8 10 12 16 20 25
Rod end KJ4D KJ6D KJ8D KJ10D 1 rod end
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKM4-8 GKM6-12 GKM8-16 GKM10-20 1 double knuckle joint
Floating joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100 JA20-8-125 JA30-10-125 1 floating joint
* Refer to page 16 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts
Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

20 C85A-20PS Every set includes:


1 rod seal

C75
1 flat washer * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
25 C85A-25PS 1 retaining ring separately) on the sliding parts.

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Weights
[g]
Bore size [mm] 8 10 12 16 20 25
C85RAF 38 39 72 78 151 231
C85RAY 38 39 72 79 152 232
Without magnet
C85RBF — — — — 148 230
Basic C85RBY — — — — 148 231
weight CD85RAF 38 40 72 79 154 235
CD85RAY 38 40 73 79 155 236
With magnet
CD85RBF — — — — 151 234
CD85RBY — — — — 152 235 Calculation example: C85RAF20-50V
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 2.1 2.3 4.1 5.1 8.1 11.3 O Basic weight··········· 151 g (ø20)
Rod end KJlD 17 25 45 70 O Additional weight···· 8.1 g (at 10 mm stroke)
O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Accessory Double knuckle joint GKMl-l 10 20 50 100 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 45 g
Floating joint JAl-l-l 10 20 50 70 151 + 8.1 x 50/10 + 45 ≈ 237 g

C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

58
C85R Series

Dimensions
Bottom side mounting: Cl85RAF/Y 8 to 16 Stroke B
Width across (XB) G2
2 x øLD flats SW (WH) G1 EE EE
KK

NA

NA
B
LH

øC
Width across flats K
AM N1 N2
LX NA NA
L H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke Boss-cut/Basic Head cover axial port

Dimensions [mm]
Bore size AM B C EE G1 G2 H K KK L LD LH LX N1 N2 NA S SW (WH) (XB) ZZ
8 12 16 4 M5 x 0.8 19 5 16 — M4 x 0.7 23 ø3.5, ø6.5 counterbore depth 4 8 14 23.5 9.5 15 58 7 4 12 74
10 12 16 4 M5 x 0.8 19 5 16 — M4 x 0.7 23 ø3.5, ø6.5 counterbore depth 4 8 14 23.5 9.5 15 58 7 4 12 74
12 16 20 6 M5 x 0.8 25 6 21 5 M6 x 1 26 ø4.5, ø8 counterbore depth 5 10 16 29.5 10.5 18.3 67 10 5 16 88
16 16 20 6 M5 x 0.8 25 6 21 5 M6 x 1 26 ø4.5, ø8 counterbore depth 5 10 16 29.5 10.5 18.3 67 10 5 16 88

Bottom side mounting: Cl85RAF/Y 20/25 Stroke B


Width across (XB)
2 x øLD
flats SW (WH) G1 EE EE G2
KK
øND h8

NA

NA
B
LH

Width across flats K


øC

LX AM
3 N1 N2 NA NA
L
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke Boss-cut/Basic Head cover axial port

Dimensions [mm]
Bore size AM B C EE G1 G2 H K KK L LD LH LX N1 N2 NA ND S SW (WH) (XB) ZZ
0
20 20 30.3 8 G 1/8 22 8 30 6 M8 x 1.25 33.5 ø5.5, ø9.5 counterbore depth 6.5 15 21 29 15 24 20–0.033 76 13 10 22 106
0
25 22 36.6 10 G 1/8 22 8 36 8 M10 x 1.25 39 ø6.6, ø11 counterbore depth 7.5 18 25 29 15 30 26–0.033 79 17 14 26 115

Front side mounting: Cl85RBF/Y 20/25 Stroke B


Width across
4 x øFF flats SW (WH) G1 EE EE G2
KK
øND h8

NA

NA
FX
F

Width across flats K


øC

FX AM
3 N1 N2 NA NA
F
H S + Stroke
Boss-cut/Basic Head cover axial port
ZZ + Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
Bore size AM C EE F FF FX G1 G2 H K KK N1 N2 NA ND S SW (WH) ZZ
0
20 20 8 G 1/8 30.4 M5 x 0.8 depth 9 22 22 8 30 6 M8 x 1.25 29 15 24 20–0.033 76 13 10 106
0
25 22 10 G 1/8 36.4 M6 x 1 depth 11 26 22 8 36 8 M10 x 1.25 29 15 30 26–0.033 79 17 14 115

Refer to page 16 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories


(rod end, double knuckle joint, floating joint).

59
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Single Rod

C75
ø32, ø40
Series

C85
How to Order

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Double acting, Single rod C D 75 E 32 100 C J L V B M9BW
Built-in magnet
Nil None Number of auto switches
D Built-in magnet Auto switch mounting type*1 Nil 2
A Rail mounting S 1
B Band mounting n n
Head cover type
*1 T
 he symbol is “Nil” for no
E Double end boss-cut magnet. Auto switch
F Boss-cut/Basic Bore size Nil Without auto switch
Y Head cover axial port 32 32 mm Accessory*1 * F or applicable auto switches,
40 40 mm Nil None refer to the table below.
Applicable head cover V Rod end * Auto switches are shipped
Head cover type
Action Cylinder stroke [mm] *1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/ together with the product.

C75
E F Y Accessories on page 62 for
Refer to the next page for
Rubber
V V V standard strokes. details of accessories. Made to order
bumper * Accessory is shipped together For details, refer to page 61.

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Air cushion V — — Cushion with the product.
Nil Rubber bumper (Standard) Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
C Air cushion Nil None Head Mounting bracket
Action
L Single foot cover type L M G U N
Rod boot M Double foot E V V V V V
Rubber
Nil Without rod boot G Flange
bumper
F V — V V V
J Nylon tarpaulin (One end) U Trunnion Y V — V V V
K Heat-resistant tarpaulin (One end) N Clevis
Air cushion E V V V V V
*1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/
Accessories on page 62 for
details of mounting brackets.
* Mounting bracket is shipped
together with the product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N F7NV F79 V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P F7PV F7P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B F7BV J79 V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V — C96
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW F7NWV F79W V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW — F7PW V V V v — v
C96Y C96K

(2-color indicator) PLC


2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW F7BWV J79W V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 — — v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 — — v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 F7BAV∗1 F7BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 — A76H V — V — — — IC circuit —
C55
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A73∗2 A73H∗2 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A80 A80H V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Products Order Switch

Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC


Related Made to Auto

Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit


Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW L (Example) M9NWL
3 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
60
C75 Series

Specifications

Bore size [mm] 32 40


Type Pneumatic
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating Rubber bumper 0.05 MPa
pressure Air cushion 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Rubber bumper
Cushion
Air cushion

Symbol Allowable Rubber bumper 0.65 J 1.2 J


kinetic energy Air cushion 1.07 J 2.35 J
Double acting, Air cushion
Single rod

Standard Strokes

Bore size Max. stroke*2


Standard stroke [mm]*1*3
[mm] [mm]
32
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 300 1000
40
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with *1 Other strokes are available on request.
auto switches. *2 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).
*3 The minimum stroke with air cushion is 25 mm.
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly
• Operating Range
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.
Cylinder model: CD75E40-50NV-B-M9BW

Double end boss-cut


Head cover E: Double end boss-cut
Made to Order Mounting bracket N: Clevis
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.) Rod end Rod end bracket V: Rod end
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
Symbol Specifications
-XA Change of rod end shape * M
 ounting bracket, rod end, and auto switch
are shipped together with the product.
-XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)*1, *2
Clevis
-XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder (–40 to 70°C)*1, *2
-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)*1
Auto switch
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper*1
-XC6l Made of stainless steel
*1 Rubber bumper only
*2 Excludes with rod end (Accessory)
Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to
the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation
Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com

A 61
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Single Rod C75 Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting Foot/ Trunnion Trunnion Clevis pivot Clevis
Rod end
nut nut nut Flange pin washer bracket bolt

C85
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (2 pcs.) V (2 pcs.) — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (2 pcs.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) —
Accessory symbol V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
32 40
Rod end nut C75NT32Z C75NT40Z 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C75SN32Z C75SN40Z 1 mounting nut
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75F32AZ C75F40AZ 1 flange, 1 foot bracket

C75
Flange, Foot 2 flanges, 2 foot brackets,
C75F32BZ C75F40BZ
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
Mounting
bracket Flange, Foot 1 flange, 1 foot bracket,

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


C75F32CZ C75F40CZ
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
2 trunnion pins,
Trunnion C75T32Z C75T40Z
2 trunnion washers
1 clevis pivot bracket, 2 clevis bolts,
Clevis C75C32Z C75C40Z
2 trunnion washers
Rod end KJ10DA KJ12DA 1 rod end
Accessory
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
* Refer to page 67 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Standard Type


Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

32 C75A-32PS Every set includes:


1 rod seal
1 flat washer * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
40 C75A-40PS 1 retaining ring separately) on the sliding parts.

Weights
[kg]
C96
Bore size [mm] 32 40
0.34 0.65
C96Y C96K

C75E
(0.37) (0.64)
Without magnet
C75F 0.31 0.61
Basic C75Y 0.31 0.61
weight 0.34 0.66
CD75E
(0.37) (0.65)
With magnet
CD75F 0.32 0.61
C55

CD75Y 0.32 0.61


Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.02 0.03
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75FlAZ 0.11 0.2
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Flange, Foot Calculation example: C75E32-50NV


Mounting (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C75FlBZ 0.25 0.46
bracket O Basic weight··········· 0.34 kg (ø32)
Trunnion C75TlZ 0.02 0.03 O Additional weight···· 0.02 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C75ClZ 0.17 0.31 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 0.17 kg
Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.34 + 0.02 x 50/10 + 0.17 + 0.07 = 0.68 kg
( ): For air cushion

62
C75 Series

Dimensions
Double end boss-cut
Rubber bumper: Cl75E Bore size Stroke l
(XC + Stroke) G
(XB)
(WH) G
Effective thread length FM 8
)
2 x BE Port 2 x EE R
(H

øD
KK

45°
2 x øEh8

NB
øTD
øC

Width across
flats SW
K 1.5
Width across TW
flats KA
AL KW 4 x TC 1.5
øKV (Nut)
AM FA Effective thread length FL
H S + Stroke FB Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
ZZ + Stroke Without magnet

Air cushion: Cl75E Bore size Stroke C l


(XC + Stroke) G
Cushion needle Cushion needle
(XB) WA (Width across flats 1.5) (Width across flats 1.5)
8
WA
Port 2 x EE 45° 45° 45°

øD

NB
øTD
)
R
(H
H S + Stroke øKV (Nut)
ZZ + Stroke
Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
(Wh) Without magnet
With rod boot KK 8 l 8
øC
øe
(JH)

Width across flats KA AL


(JW) AM K f
h

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE C D E EE FA FB FM FL G H (HR) K KA KK KV
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 12 37.5 30 G1/8 30 14 27 11 9 58 23.8 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 38
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 14 46.5 38 G1/4 35 16 32 13 12 69 28.3 7 12 M12 x 1.75 50

Bore
size
KW NB S SW TC TD TW WA (WH) (XB) (XC) ZZ
32 7 34.5 68 17 M8 x 1 12+0.08
0 33.1 14 38 47 97 140
40 8 42.5 89 19 M10 x 1 14+0.08
0 39.5 20 45 57 122 174

With Rod Boot [mm]


Item h
Bore size Stroke AL AM C e f K KA KK
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
32 17 20 12 36 32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 77 90 102 115 140 165 190
40 21 24 14 46 37 7 12 M12 x 1.75 88 101 113 126 151 176 201
Item I (JH) (JW) (Wh)
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 Reference Reference 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
32 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 23.5 10.5 57 70 82 95 120 145 170
40 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 27 10.5 64 77 89 102 127 152 177

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

63
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Single Rod C75 Series

Dimensions
Boss-cut/Basic
Rubber bumper: Cl75F Bore size Stroke l
(XB)

C85
(WH) G G
BE Effective thread length FM 8
)

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


KK Port 2 x EE R
(H

øD
45°
øEh8

NB
øTD

øC

Width across flats SW


TW Width across flats KA K 1.5 øKV (Nut)
AL KW 2 x TC
AM FA Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
H S + Stroke Without magnet
ZZ + Stroke

C75
Head cover axial port

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Rubber bumper: Cl75Y Bore size Stroke l
(XB)
(WH) G
BE Effective thread length FM 8
)
KK Port EE Port EE R
(H
øD

45°
øEh8

NB
øTD

øC

Width across flats SW


TW Width across flats KA K 1.5 øKV (Nut)
AL KW 2 x TC
AM FA Rail mounting (A) Band mounting (B)
H S + Stroke Without magnet
ZZ + Stroke

C96
C96Y C96K

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE C D E EE FA FM G H (HR) K KA KK KV KW
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 12 37.5 30 G1/8 30 27 9 58 23.8 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 38 7
40
C55

21 24 M38 x 1.5 14 46.5 38 G1/4 35 32 12 69 28.3 7 12 M12 x 1.75 50 8

Bore
size
NB S SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB) ZZ
32 34.5 68 17 M8 x 1 12 +0.08
0 33.1 38 47 126
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

40 42.5 89 19 M10 x 1 14 +0.08


0 39.5 45 57 158

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

64
C75 Series

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl75El lL/Flange: Cl75El lG (With mounting bracket)


(W) LT
NH
LT

2 x øAB (XS)

Double foot: Cl75El lM (With mounting bracket)


(W) LT 4x
8 x øFD

TF
UR
4 x øAB
NH

AV TR
LT

LS + Stroke US
(XL + Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore
size
AB AO AV FD LS LT NH TF TR UR US (W) (XL) (XS)
32 7 7 14 7 96 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 120 48
40 9 10 20 9 129 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 154 60

Rod trunnion: Cl75El lU


(With mounting bracket) øTDe8
TZ

Port
(XB)

Head trunnion: Cl75El lU


øTDe8
(With mounting bracket)
TZ

Port
(XC + Stroke)  [mm]
Bore
size
TDe8 TZ (XB) (XC)
32 10 –0.025
–0.047 49.9 47 97
40 12 –0.032
–0.059 62.3 57 122

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

65
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Single Rod C75 Series

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod clevis: Cl75El lN


(With mounting bracket)
(XB)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
LT
CO
CE CR 4 x øAB
CG

Head clevis: Cl75El lN


(With mounting bracket) Width across
(XC + Stroke) flats CW CZ

C75
CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W
CH
LT

CO
CE CR 4 x øAB CT
CG CU

 [mm]
Bore
size
AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT (XB) (XC)
32 7 9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 97
40 9 12 52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 122

C96

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


C96Y C96K

accessories (rod end, floating joint).


C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

66
C75 Series
Dimensions of Accessories
Rod End
ødH7

45
°
b1
b3

d3
α° α° l

l3
d6

d7

[mm]
Bore size Part no. b1 b3 dH7 d6 d7 h l l3 d3 a°
32 KJ10DA 14 10.5 10 28 19 43 20 15 M10 x 1.5 13
40 KJ12DA 16 12 12 32 22 50 22 17 M12 x 1.75 13

Floating Joint: JA

M
M
U

øD
U

F
G

H B E P

[mm]
M Max. operating
Max. screw-in Allowable tension and
Bore size Part no. Nominal A B D E F G H
Pitch depth P eccentricity U compression
thread dia. power [kN]
32 JA25-10-150 10 1.5 49.5 19.5 24 5  8  8 17  9 0.5 2.5
40 JA40-12-175 12 1.75 60 20 31 6 11 11 22 13 0.75 4.4

67
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Double Rod

C75W
ø32, ø40
Series

C85
How to Order

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Double acting, Double rod C D 75WE 32 100 C J L V B M9BW
Built-in magnet Bore size
Nil None 32 32 mm Auto switch
D Built-in magnet 40 40 mm Nil Without auto switch
* F
 or applicable auto switches,
Cylinder stroke [mm] refer to the table below.
Refer to the next page for Cushion * A
 uto switches are shipped
standard strokes. together with the product.
Nil Rubber bumper (Standard)
C Air cushion
Auto switch Number of
Rod boot mounting type*1 auto switches
Nil Without rod boot A Rail mounting Nil 2
J

C75
Nylon tarpaulin (One end) B Band mounting S 1
K Heat-resistant tarpaulin (One end) *1 T
 he symbol is “Nil” n n
JJ Nylon tarpaulin (Both ends) for no magnet.

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


KK Heat-resistant tarpaulin (Both ends)
Made to order
Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket For details, refer to page 69.
Nil None Mounting bracket
L Single foot
Action
L M G U N Accessory*1
M Double foot Rubber Nil None
V V V V V V Rod end
G Flange bumper
U Trunnion *1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on
Air cushion V V V V V
N Clevis page 70 for details of accessories.
* Accessory is shipped together with the product.
*1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on page 70 for details of
mounting brackets.
* M
 ounting bracket is shipped together with the product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N F7NV F79 V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P F7PV F7P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B F7BV J79 V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW F7NWV F79W V V V v — v C96
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW — F7PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW F7BWV J79W V V V v — —
C96Y C96K

v
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 — — v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 — — v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 F7BAV∗1 F7BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 — A76H V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
C55

Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A73∗2 A73H∗2 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A80 A80H V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit


Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
68
C75W Series

Specifications

Bore size [mm] 32 40


Type Pneumatic
Action Double acting, Double rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating Rubber bumper 0.08 MPa
pressure Air cushion 0.08 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Symbol Cushion
Rubber bumper
Air cushion
Rubber bumper
Allowable Rubber bumper 0.65 J 1.2 J
kinetic energy Air cushion 1.07 J 2.35 J

Standard Strokes
Air cushion

Bore size Max. stroke*2


Standard stroke [mm]*1*3
[mm] [mm]
32
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 300 500
40
*1 Other strokes are available on request.
*2 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).
*3 The minimum stroke with air cushion is 25 mm.
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with
auto switches.
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting
• Operating Range
Cylinder model: CD75WE40-50MV-B-M9BW
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.
Rod end Mounting bracket M: Double foot
Rod end bracket V: Rod end
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
Made to Order
* M
 ounting bracket, rod end, and auto switch
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.) Double foot are shipped together with the product.
Symbol Specifications
Auto switch
-XA Change of rod end shape
-XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)*1
-XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder (–40 to 70°C)*1
-XC6l Made of stainless steel
*1 Rubber bumper only Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to
the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation
Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com

69
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Double Rod C75W Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting Foot/ Trunnion Trunnion Clevis pivot Clevis
Rod end
nut nut nut Flange pin washer bracket bolt

C85
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — V (2 pcs.) V (2 pcs.) — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — V (2 pcs.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) —
Accessory symbol V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
32 40
Rod end nut C75NT32Z C75NT40Z 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C75SN32Z C75SN40Z 1 mounting nut
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75F32AZ C75F40AZ 1 flange, 1 foot bracket

C75
Flange, Foot 2 flanges, 2 foot brackets,
C75F32BZ C75F40BZ
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
Mounting

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


bracket Flange, Foot C75F32CZ C75F40CZ
1 flange, 1 foot bracket,
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
2 trunnion pins,
Trunnion C75T32Z C75T40Z
2 trunnion washers
1 clevis pivot bracket, 2 clevis bolts,
Clevis C75C32Z C75C40Z
2 trunnion washers
Rod end KJ10DA KJ12DA 1 rod end
Accessory
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
* Refer to page 67 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Standard Type


Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

32 C75A-32PS Every set includes: * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
1 rod seal separately) on the sliding parts.
1 flat washer When replacing seals for a double rod actuator, order 2 sets
40 C75A-40PS 1 retaining ring of replacement parts.

Weights
[kg] C96
Bore size [mm] 32 40
C96Y C96K

0.41 0.77
Without magnet C75WE
Basic (0.45) (0.79)
weight 0.42 0.78
With magnet CD75WE
(0.46) (0.8)
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.03 0.04
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75FlAZ 0.11 0.2
C55

Flange, Foot Calculation example: C75WE32-50MV


Mounting (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C75FlBZ 0.25 0.46
bracket O Basic weight··········· 0.41 kg (ø32)
Trunnion C75TlZ 0.02 0.03 O Additional weight···· 0.03 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C75ClZ 0.17 0.31 O Cylinder stroke····························50 mm
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

O Mounting bracket: Double foot····0.25 kg


Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end····················0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.41 + 0.03 x 50/10 + 0.25 + 0.07 = 0.88 kg
( ): For air cushion

70
C75W Series

Dimensions
Double end boss-cut
Rubber bumper: Cl75WE Bore size Stroke l
(XB) (XB + Stroke)
(WH) G G (WH + Stroke)
Effective thread length 2 x FM Port 2 x EE 2 x BE
KK KK øD

NB
øTD
øC

øC
Width across flats SW Width across flats SW
Width across flats KA K Width across flats KA

2 x øEh8
1.5
AL KW 4 x TC 1.5 AL TW
AM FA FA K AM øKV (Nut)
H S + Stroke H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

Air cushion: Cl75WE Bore size Stroke C l


Cushion needle
(XB) (XB + Stroke) (Width across flats 1.5)
WA WA
45°
Port 2 x EE G

øD

NB
øTD
H S + Stroke H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke øKV (Nut)

With rod boot (Wh)


KK 8 l 8
øC
øe
(JH)

Width across flats KA AL


(JW) AM K f
h

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE C D E EE FA FM G H K KA KK KV KW NB
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 12 37.5 30 G1/8 30 27 9 58 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 14 46.5 38 G1/4 35 32 12 69 7 12 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5

Bore
size
S SW TC TD TW WA (WH) (XB) ZZ
32 68 17 M8 x 1 +0.08
120 33.1 14 38 47 184
40 89 19 M10 x 1 +0.08
140 39.5 20 45 57 227

With Rod Boot [mm]


Item h
Bore size Stroke AL AM C e f K KA KK
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
32 17 20 12 36 32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 77 90 102 115 140 165 190
40 21 24 14 46 37 7 12 M12 x 1.75 88 101 113 126 151 176 201
Item I (JH) (JW) (Wh)
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500 Reference Reference 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 300 301 to 400 401 to 500
32 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 23.5 10.5 57 70 82 95 120 145 170
40 12.5 25 37.5 50 75 100 125 27 10.5 64 77 89 102 127 152 177

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

71
Air Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Double Rod C75W Series

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl75WEl lL/Flange: Cl75WEl lG


(With mounting bracket)
(W) LT

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
NH
LT

2 x øAB (XS)

Double foot: Cl75WEl lM

C75
(With mounting bracket)
4x
(W) LT 8 x øFD

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


TF
UR
NH
LT

4 x øAB AV TR
LS + Stroke US
(XL + Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore
size
AB AO AV FD LS LT NH TF TR UR US (W) (XL) (XS) C96
32 7 7 14 7 96 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 120 48
40
C96Y C96K

9 10 20 9 129 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 154 60

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

72
C75W Series

Dimensions Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Trunnion: Cl75WEl lU
(With mounting bracket)
øTDe8
TZ

Port
(XB) (XC + 2 x Stroke)
 [mm]
Bore
size
TDe8 TZ (XB) (XC)
32 10 –0.025
–0.047 49.9 47 97
40 12 –0.032
–0.059 62.3 57 122

Clevis: Cl75WEl lN
(With mounting bracket) Width across
(XB) (XC + 2 x Stroke) flats CW CZ

CH
LT

CO
CE CR 4 x øAB CT
CG CU

 [mm]
Bore
size
AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT (XB) (XC)
32 7 9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 97
40 9 12 52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 122

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

73
Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

C75
ø32, ø40
Series

C85
How to Order

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Single acting, Spring return/extend C D 75 E 32 100 S L V B M9BW
Built-in magnet
Number of auto switches
Nil None
Auto switch mounting type*1 Nil 2
D Built-in magnet Bore size
A Rail mounting S 1
32 32 mm
B Band mounting n n
40 40 mm
Head cover type *1 T
 he symbol is “Nil” for no
E Double end boss-cut magnet.
Cylinder stroke [mm] Auto switch
F Boss-cut/Basic
Refer to the next page for Accessory*1 Nil Without auto switch
Y Head cover axial port
standard strokes. Nil None * F
 or applicable auto switches,
Applicable head cover V Rod end refer to the table below.
Head cover type Action * A
 uto switches are shipped
Action *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/

C75
S Single acting, Spring return together with the product.
E F Y Accessories on page 76 for
Single acting, T Single acting, Spring extend details of accessories.
V V V
Spring return * Accessory is shipped together Made to order

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Single acting, with the product. For details, refer to page 75.
V V —
Spring extend
Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
Nil None Head Mounting bracket
Action
L Single foot cover type L M G U N
M Double foot E V V V V V
Single acting,
G Flange
Spring return
F V — V V V
U Trunnion Y V — V V V
N Clevis Single acting, E V V V V V
*1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on Spring extend F V — V V V
page 76 for details of mounting brackets.
* M
 ounting bracket is shipped together with the
product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N F7NV F79 V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P F7PV F7P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B F7BV J79 V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW F7NWV F79W V V V v — v C96
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW — F7PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW F7BWV J79W V V V v — —
C96Y C96K

v
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 — — v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 — — v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 F7BAV∗1 F7BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 — A76H V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
C55

Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A73∗2 A73H∗2 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A80 A80H V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit


Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
74
C75 Series

Specifications
Bore size [mm] 32 40
Type Pneumatic
Action Single acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Spring return: 0.18 MPa
Min. operating pressure
Spring extend: 0.23 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance   0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable kinetic energy 0.65 J 1.2 J

Symbol
Standard Strokes
Single acting: Spring return, Rubber bumper

Bore size Max. stroke


Standard stroke [mm]*2
[mm] [mm]
32 200
10, 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250*1
40 250
Single acting: Spring extend, Rubber bumper *1 Not available for ø32.
*2 Other strokes are available on request. (Request based production)

Spring Retracting Force


Spring Return [N]
Spring force
Bore Standard
10 25 50 100 150 200 250
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with size stroke
auto switches. [mm] [mm] Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position 10, 25,
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height 32 50, 100, 53.9 48.8 53.9 41.2 53.9 28.4 66.7 19.6 66.7 18.1 66.7 19.6 — —
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting 150, 200
• Operating Range 10, 25, 50,
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.
40 100, 150, 78.5 72.6 78.5 63.7 78.5 49.0 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5
200, 250
Spring Extend [N]
Spring force
Bore Standard
10 25 50 100 150 200 250
Made to Order size stroke
Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.) [mm] [mm]
retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended
Symbol Specifications 10, 25,
-XA Change of rod end shape 32 50, 100, 66.7 56.3 66.7 40.7 66.7 14.7 66.7 19.6 66.7 18.1 66.7 19.6 — —
150, 200
-XC6l Made of stainless steel
10, 25, 50,
40 100, 150, 76.5 65.9 76.5 50.0 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5
200, 250

Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Cylinder model: CD75E40-50SNV-B-M9BW

Precautions Double end boss-cut


Head cover E: Double end boss-cut
Mounting bracket N: Clevis
Rod end Rod end bracket V: Rod end
Be sure to read this before handling the
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
products. Refer to page 219 for safety
instructions. For actuator and auto switch * M
 ounting bracket, rod end, and auto switch
precautions, refer to the “Handling are shipped together with the product.
Clevis
Precautions for SMC Products” and the
“Operation Manual” on the SMC website:
Auto switch
http://www.smcworld.com

75
Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75 Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting Foot/ Trunnion Trunnion Clevis pivot Clevis
Rod end
nut nut nut Flange pin washer bracket bolt
L

C85
Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (2 pcs.) V (2 pcs.) — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (2 pcs.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) —
Accessory symbol V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
32 40
Rod end nut C75NT32Z C75NT40Z 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C75SN32Z C75SN40Z 1 mounting nut
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75F32AZ C75F40AZ 1 flange, 1 foot bracket

C75
Flange, Foot 2 flanges, 2 foot brackets,
C75F32BZ C75F40BZ
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
Mounting
bracket Flange, Foot 1 flange, 1 foot bracket,

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


C75F32CZ C75F40CZ
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
2 trunnion pins,
Trunnion C75T32Z C75T40Z
2 trunnion washers
1 clevis pivot bracket, 2 clevis bolts,
Clevis C75C32Z C75C40Z
2 trunnion washers
Rod end KJ10DA KJ12DA 1 rod end
Accessory
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
* Refer to page 67 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Standard Type (Only for single acting, spring extend)
Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

32 C75A-32PS Every set includes: * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
1 rod seal separately) on the sliding parts.
1 flat washer In the single acting, spring return type, there is no rod seal so
40 C75A-40PS 1 retaining ring it is not possible to replace any seals.

C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

76
C75 Series

Weights
Single Acting, Spring Return (S) [kg]
Bore size [mm] 32 40
C75El-lS 0.34 0.65
1 to 50 mm stroke C75Fl-lS 0.32 0.61
C75Yl-lS 0.32 0.61
C75El-lS 0.55 0.86
51 to 100 mm stroke C75Fl-lS 0.53 0.81
C75Yl-lS 0.53 0.81
C75El-lS 0.65 0.97
Without
101 to 150 mm stroke C75Fl-lS 0.62 0.92
magnet
C75Yl-lS 0.62 0.92
C75El-lS 0.74 1.07
151 to 200 mm stroke C75Fl-lS 0.71 1.03
C75Yl-lS 0.71 1.03
C75El-lS — 1.17
201 to 250 mm stroke C75Fl-lS — 1.13
Basic C75Yl-lS — 1.13
weight CD75El-lS 0.35 0.66
1 to 50 mm stroke CD75Fl-lS 0.32 0.61
CD75Yl-lS 0.32 0.62
CD75El-lS 0.56 0.86
51 to 100 mm stroke CD75Fl-lS 0.54 0.82
CD75Yl-lS 0.54 0.82
CD75El-lS 0.65 0.97
With
101 to 150 mm stroke CD75Fl-lS 0.63 0.93
magnet
CD75Yl-lS 0.63 0.93
CD75El-lS 0.74 1.08
151 to 200 mm stroke CD75Fl-lS 0.72 1.03
CD75Yl-lS 0.72 1.04
CD75El-lS — 1.18
201 to 250 mm stroke CD75Fl-lS — 1.13
CD75Yl-lS — 1.14
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.02 0.03
Calculation example: C75E32-50SNV
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75FlAZ 0.11 0.2
O Basic weight··········· 0.34 kg (ø32)
Mounting Flange, Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C75FlBZ 0.25 0.46
O Additional weight···· 0.02 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
bracket Trunnion C75TlZ 0.02 0.03 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Clevis C75ClZ 0.17 0.31 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 0.17 kg
Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.34 + 0.02 x 50/10 + 0.17 + 0.07 = 0.68 kg

Single Acting, Spring Extend (T) [kg]


Bore size [mm] 32 40
C75El-lT 0.39 0.71
1 to 50 mm stroke
C75Fl-lT 0.36 0.67
C75El-lT 0.45 0.8
51 to 100 mm stroke
C75Fl-lT 0.42 0.75
Without C75El-lT 0.51 0.88
101 to 150 mm stroke
magnet C75Fl-lT 0.48 0.84
C75El-lT 0.57 0.96
151 to 200 mm stroke
C75Fl-lT 0.54 0.92
C75El-lT — 1.04
201 to 250 mm stroke
Basic C75Fl-lT — 0.99
weight CD75El-lT 0.39 0.72
1 to 50 mm stroke
CD75Fl-lT 0.37 0.67
CD75El-lT 0.45 0.8
51 to 100 mm stroke
CD75Fl-lT 0.43 0.76
With CD75El-lT 0.51 0.89
101 to 150 mm stroke
magnet CD75Fl-lT 0.49 0.84
CD75El-lT 0.57 0.97
151 to 200 mm stroke
CD75Fl-lT 0.55 0.92
CD75El-lT — 1.04
201 to 250 mm stroke
CD75Fl-lT — 1.0
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.02 0.03
Calculation example: C75E32-50TNV
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75FlAZ 0.11 0.2
O Basic weight··········· 0.39 kg (ø32)
Mounting Flange, Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C75FlBZ 0.25 0.46
O Additional weight···· 0.02 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
bracket Trunnion C75TlZ 0.02 0.03 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Clevis C75ClZ 0.17 0.31 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 0.17 kg
Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.39 + 0.02 x 50/10 + 0.17 + 0.07 = 0.73 kg
77
Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Double end boss-cut
Cl75E Bore size Stroke S l
(XC + Stroke) G

C85
(XB)
(WH) G

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


2 x BE Effective thread length FM Port EE

øD
KK

2 x øEh8

NB
øTD
øC

Width across flats SW


Width across flats KA K 1.5
AL KW 4 x TC 1.5 TW
AM FA Effective thread length FL øKV (Nut)
H S + Stroke FB
ZZ + Stroke

Boss-cut/Basic

C75
Cl75F Bore size Stroke S l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(XB)
(WH) G
BE Effective thread length FM Port EE G
KK

øD

NB
øEh8
øTD

øC

Width across flats SW


K 1.5
TW Width across flats KA
AL KW 2 x TC øKV (Nut)
AM FA
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE C D E EE FA FB FM FL G H K KA KK KV KW
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 12 37.5 30 G1/8 30 14 27 11 9 58 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 38 7
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 14 46.5 38 G1/4 35 16 32 13 12 69 7 12 M12 x 1.75 50 8 C96

Bore
C96Y C96K

size
NB SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB)
32 34.5 17 M8 x 1 12+0.08
0 33.1 38 47
40 42.5 19 M10 x 1 14+0.08
0 39.5 45 57

Double End Boss-cut [mm]


Item S (XC) ZZ
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
C55

32 68 118 143 168 — 97 147 172 197 — 140 190 215 240 —
40 89 139 164 189 214 122 172 197 222 247 174 224 249 274 299

Boss-cut/Basic [mm]
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Item S ZZ
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 68 118 143 168 — 126 176 201 226 —
40 89 139 164 189 214 158 208 233 258 283

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

78
C75 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Head cover axial port
Cl75Y Bore size Stroke S l

(XB)
(WH) G
KK BE Effective thread length FM Port EE
øD

NB
øEh8
øTD

øC

Width across flats SW


K 1.5
Width across flats KA
TW AL KW 2 x TC øKV (Nut)
AM FA
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE C D E EE FA FM G H K KA KK KV KW NB SW
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 12 37.5 30 G1/8 30 27 9 58 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5 17
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 14 46.5 38 G1/4 35 32 12 69 7 12 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5 19

Bore S ZZ
size
TC TD TW (WH) (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 M8 x 1 12+0.08
0 33.1 38 47 68 118 143 168 — 126 176 201 226 —
40 M10 x 1 14+0.08
0 39.5 45 57 89 139 164 189 214 158 208 233 258 283

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

79
Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl75El lSL/Flange: Cl75El lSG (With mounting bracket)


(W) LT

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
NH
LT

2 x øAB (XS)

Double foot: Cl75El lSM (With mounting bracket)


4x
(W) LT 8 x øFD

TF
UR
4 x øAB
NH

C75
AV TR
LT

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


LS + Stroke US
(XL + Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV FD LT NH TF TR UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 7 14 7 96 146 171 196 — 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 120 170 195 220 — 48
40 9 10 20 9 129 179 204 229 254 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 154 204 229 254 279 60

Rod trunnion: Cl75El lSU


(With mounting bracket) øTDe8
TZ

Port
(XB)
C96

Head trunnion: Cl75El lSU


C96Y C96K

øTDe8
(With mounting bracket)
TZ

C55

Port
(XC + Stroke)
 [mm]
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Bore (XC)
size
TDe8 TZ (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 10 –0.025
–0.047 49.9 47 97 147 172 197 —
40 12 –0.032
–0.059 62.3 57 122 172 197 222 247

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

80
C75 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod clevis: Cl75El lSN


(With mounting bracket)
(XB)

LT
CO
CE CR 4 x øAB
CG

Head clevis: Cl75El lSN


(With mounting bracket) Width across
(XC + Stroke) flats CW CZ

CH
LT

CO
CE CR 4 x øAB CT
CG CU

 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 97 147 172 197 —
40 9 12 52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 122 172 197 222 247

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

81
Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend


Double end boss-cut
Cl75E Bore size Stroke T l

(XC + 2 x Stroke)

C85
(XB + Stroke)
(WH + Stroke) G

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Effective thread length FM
2 x BE Port EE
KK

øD
2 x øEh8

NB
øTD
øC

Width across flats SW


Width across flats KA KW
AL 1.5 4 x TC 1.5
AM K FA Effective thread length FL
H + Stroke S + Stroke FB TW
ZZ + 2 x Stroke øKV (Nut)

C75
Boss-cut/Basic
Cl75F Bore size Stroke T l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(XB + Stroke)
(WH + Stroke) G
Effective thread length FM
BE Port EE
KK

øD

NB
øTD

øC

Width across flats SW


Width across flats KA
øEh8

KW
AL 1.5 2 x TC
AM K FA
H + Stroke S + Stroke
TW ZZ + 2 x Stroke øKV (Nut)

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
C96
size
AL AM BE C D E EE FA FB FM FL G H K KA KK KV KW NB SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB)
C96Y C96K

32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 12 37.5 30 G1/8 30 14 27 11 9 58 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5 17 M8 x 1 12+0.08


0 33.1 38 47
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 14 46.5 38 G1/4 35 16 32 13 12 69 7 12 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5 19 M10 x 1 14+0.08
0 39.5 45 57

Double End Boss-cut [mm]


Item S (XC) ZZ
Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
Bore size
C55

32 93 118 143 168 — 122 147 172 197 — 165 190 215 240 —
40 114 139 164 189 214 147 172 197 222 247 199 224 249 274 299

Boss-cut/Basic [mm]
Products Order Switch

Item S ZZ
Related Made to Auto

Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
Bore size
32 93 118 143 168 — 151 176 201 226 —
40 114 139 164 189 214 183 208 233 258 283

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

82
C75 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl75El lTL/Flange: Cl75El lTG (With mounting bracket)


(W + Stroke) LT
NH

LT

2 x øAB
(XS + Stroke)

Double foot: Cl75El lTM (With mounting bracket)


4x
(W + Stroke) LT 8 x øFD

TF
UR
4 x øAB
NH

LT

AV TR
LS + Stroke US
(XL + 2 x Stroke) AO

 [mm]
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV FD LT NH TF TR UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 7 14 7 121 146 171 196 — 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 145 170 195 220 — 48
40 9 10 20 9 154 179 204 229 254 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 179 204 229 254 279 60

Rod trunnion: Cl75El lTU


(With mounting bracket) øTDe8
TZ

Port
(XB + Stroke)

Head trunnion: Cl75El lTU øTDe8

(With mounting bracket)


TZ

Port
(XC + 2 x Stroke)
 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
TDe8 TZ (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 10 –0.025
–0.047 49.9 47 122 147 172 197 —
40 12 –0.032
–0.059 62.3 57 147 172 197 222 247

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

83
Air Cylinder: Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75 Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod clevis: Cl75El lTN


(With mounting bracket)
(XB + Stroke)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
LT
CO
CE CR 4 x øAB
CG

Head clevis: Cl75El lTN


(With mounting bracket)

C75
Width across
(XC + 2 x Stroke) flats CW CZ

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


CH
LT

CO CT
CE CR 4 x øAB CU
CG

 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 122 147 172 197 —
40 9 12 52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 147 172 197 222 247

C96
Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of
accessories (rod end, floating joint).
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

84
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Single Rod

C75K
ø32, ø40
Series
How to Order

Double acting, Single rod C D 75K E 32 100 L V B M9BW


Built-in magnet Number of auto
Nil None Auto switch mounting type*1 switches
D Built-in magnet A Rail mounting Nil 2
B Band mounting S 1
 *1 T
 he symbol is “Nil” for no n n
Head cover type
magnet.
E Double end boss-cut Auto switch
F Boss-cut/Basic Accessory*1 Nil Without auto switch
Y Head cover axial port
Nil None * F
 or applicable auto switches,
Applicable head cover V Rod end refer to the table below.
Head cover type *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/ * A
 uto switches are shipped
Action together with the product.
E F Y Accessories on page 87 for
Rubber details of accessories.
bumper
V V V * Accessory is shipped together Made to order
with the product. For details, refer to page 86.

Bore size Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket


32 32 mm Nil None Head Mounting bracket
Action
40 40 mm L Single foot cover type L M G U N
M Double foot E V V V V V
Rubber
Cylinder stroke [mm] G Flange
bumper
F V — V V V
Refer to the next page for U Trunnion Y V — V V V
standard strokes. N Clevis
*1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories on page 87
for details of mounting brackets.
* M
 ounting bracket is shipped together with the product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N F7NV F79 V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P F7PV F7P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B F7BV J79 V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW F7NWV F79W V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW — F7PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW F7BWV J79W V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 — — v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 — — v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 F7BAV∗1 F7BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 — A76H V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A73∗2 A73H∗2 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A80 A80H V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
85
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Single Rod C75K Series

Specifications

Bore size [mm] 32 40


Type Pneumatic
Action Double acting, Single rod

C85
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Min. operating
Rubber bumper 0.05 MPa
pressure
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper
Symbol
Allowable kinetic energy 0.65 J 1.2 J
Rubber bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.5°

Standard Strokes

C75
Bore size Max. stroke*2
Standard stroke [mm]*1

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with [mm] [mm]
auto switches. 32
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 300 1000
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position 40
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height *1 Other strokes are available on request.
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting *2 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).
• Operating Range
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.
Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Made to Order Cylinder model: CD75KE40-50NV-B-M9BW


(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.)
Symbol Specifications Double end boss-cut
Head cover E: Double end boss-cut
-XA Change of rod end shape Mounting bracket N: Clevis
Rod end Rod end bracket V: Rod end
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.

* M
 ounting bracket, rod end, and auto switch
are shipped together with the product.
Clevis

Auto switch C96


C96Y C96K

Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to
C55

the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation


Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

86
C75K Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting Foot/ Trunnion Trunnion Clevis pivot Clevis
Rod end
nut nut nut Flange pin washer bracket bolt
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —
symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (2 pcs.) V (2 pcs.) — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (2 pcs.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) —
Accessory symbol V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
32 40
Rod end nut C75NT32Z C75NT40Z 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C75SN32Z C75SN40Z 1 mounting nut
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75F32AZ C75F40AZ 1 flange, 1 foot bracket
Flange, Foot 2 flanges, 2 foot brackets,
C75F32BZ C75F40BZ
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
Mounting
bracket Flange, Foot C75F32CZ C75F40CZ
1 flange, 1 foot bracket,
(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
2 trunnion pins,
Trunnion C75T32Z C75T40Z
2 trunnion washers
1 clevis pivot bracket, 2 clevis bolts,
Clevis C75C32Z C75C40Z
2 trunnion washers
Rod end KJ10DA KJ12DA 1 rod end
Accessory
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
* Refer to page 67 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Non-rotating Rod Type (K)


Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

32 C75K-32PS Every set includes:


1 rod seal
1 flat washer * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
40 C75K-40PS 1 retaining ring separately) on the sliding parts.

Weights
[kg]
Bore size [mm] 32 40
C75KE 0.36 0.69
Without magnet C75KF 0.34 0.64
Basic C75KY 0.34 0.64
weight CD75KE 0.37 0.69
With magnet CD75KF 0.34 0.65
CD75KY 0.34 0.65
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.02 0.03
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75FlAZ 0.11 0.2
Flange, Foot Calculation example: C75KE32-50NV
Mounting (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C75FlBZ 0.25 0.46
bracket O Basic weight··········· 0.36 kg (ø32)
Trunnion C75TlZ 0.02 0.03 O Additional weight···· 0.02 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
Clevis C75ClZ 0.17 0.31 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 0.17 kg
Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.36 + 0.02 x 50/10 + 0.17 + 0.07 = 0.7 kg

87
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Single Rod C75K Series

Dimensions
Double end boss-cut
Cl75KE Bore size Stroke l
(XC + Stroke) G

C85
(XB)
(WH) G

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Effective thread length FM
2 x BE Port 2 x EE
KK øD

2 x øEh8

NB
øTD
Width across flats SW
Width across flats KA 1.5
AL KW 1.5 TW
AM FA 4 x TC Effective thread length FL øKV (Nut)
H S + Stroke FB
ZZ + Stroke

C75
Boss-cut/Basic
Cl75KF Bore size Stroke l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(XB)
(WH) G
Effective thread length FM G
KK BE Port 2 x EE

øD

NB
øEh8
øTD

Width across flats SW


1.5
TW Width across flats KA AL KW 2 x TC øKV (Nut)
AM FA
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
C96
Bore
size
AL AM BE D E EE FA FB FM FL G H KA KK KV KW NB
C96Y C96K

32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 37.5 30 G1/8 30 14 27 11 9 58 12.2 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5


40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 46.5 38 G1/4 35 16 32 13 12 69 14.2 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5

Bore
size
S SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB) (XC)
32 68 17 M8 x 1 12 +0.08
0 33.1 38 47 97
40 89 19 M10 x 1 14 +0.08
0 39.5 45 57 122
C55

Double End Boss-cut


Bore
size
ZZ
Products Order Switch

32 140
Related Made to Auto

40 174

Boss-cut/Basic
Bore
size
ZZ
32 126 Refer to pages 65 and 66 of Standard Type Single Rod for
40 158 details of the mounting brackets, and refer to page 67 of
Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories (rod end,
floating joint).

88
C75K Series

Dimensions
Head cover axial port
Cl75KY Bore size Stroke l

(XB)
(WH) G
Effective thread length FM
KK BE Port EE Port EE

øD

NB
øEh8
øTD

Width across flats SW


1.5
TW Width across flats KA AL KW 2 x TC øKV (Nut)
AM FA
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE D E EE FA FM G H KA KK KV KW NB S SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB) ZZ
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 37.5 30 G1/8 30 27 9 58 12.2 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5 68 17 M8 x 1 12+0.08
0 33.1 38 47 126
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 46.5 38 G1/4 35 32 12 69 14.2 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5 89 19 M10 x 1 14+0.08
0 39.5 45 57 158

Refer to pages 65 and 66 of Standard Type Single Rod for


details of the mounting brackets, and refer to page 67 of
Standard Type Single Rod for details of accessories (rod end,
floating joint).

89
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

C75K
ø32, ø40
Series

C85
How to Order

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Single acting, Spring return/extend C D 75K E 32 100 S L V B M9BW
Built-in magnet Number of auto switches
Nil None Auto switch mounting type*1
Head cover type Nil 2
D Built-in magnet A Rail mounting S 1
E Double end boss-cut B Band mounting n n
F Boss-cut/Basic
 *1 T
 he symbol is “Nil” for no
Y Head cover axial port magnet. Auto switch
Applicable head cover Accessory*1 Nil Without auto switch
Head cover type Nil None * F
 or applicable auto switches,
Action
E F Y V Rod end refer to the table below.
Single acting, * A
 uto switches are shipped
V V V *1 Refer to Mounting Brackets/ together with the product.
Spring return

C75
Accessories on page 92 for
Single acting,
V V — details of accessories. Made to order
Spring extend * Accessory is shipped together For details, refer to page 91.

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


with the product.
Bore size Mounting bracket*1 Applicable mounting bracket
32 32 mm Nil None Head cover Mounting bracket
Action
40 40 mm L Single foot type L M G U N
M Double foot E V V V V V
Single acting,
Cylinder stroke [mm] G Flange
Spring return
F V — V V V
Refer to the next page for U Trunnion Y V — V V V
standard strokes. N Clevis Single acting, E V V V V V
*1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/ Spring extend F V — V V V
Action Accessories on page 92 for
S Single acting, Spring return details of mounting brackets.
* Mounting bracket is shipped
T Single acting, Spring extend
together with the product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting Rail mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N F7NV F79 V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P F7PV F7P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B F7BV J79 V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C J79C — V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW F7NWV F79W V V V v — v C96
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW — F7PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW F7BWV J79W V V V v — —
C96Y C96K

v
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 — — v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 — — v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 F7BAV∗1 F7BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — F79F V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire
5V — A96V A96 — A76H V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
C55

Yes
— 200 V — — A72 A72H V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 A73∗2 A73H∗2 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 A80 A80H V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C A73C — V — V V V — — PLC
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Connector No 24 V or less — C80C A80C — V — V V V — IC circuit


Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — A79W — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80l/F7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
90
C75K Series

Specifications
Bore size [mm] 32 40
Type Pneumatic
Action Single acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Min. operating Spring return: 0.18 MPa
Rubber bumper
pressure Spring extend: 0.23 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance   0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable kinetic energy 0.65 J 1.2 J
Non-rotating accuracy ±0.5°
Symbol
Single acting: Spring return, Rubber bumper Standard Strokes

Bore size Max. stroke


Standard stroke [mm]*2
[mm] [mm]
32 200
10, 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250*1
Single acting: Spring extend, Rubber bumper 40 250
*1 Not available for ø32.
*2 Other strokes are available on request. (Request based production)

Spring Retracting Force


Spring Return [N]
Spring force
Bore Standard
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with 10 25 50 100 150 200 250
size stroke
auto switches. Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
[mm] [mm]
extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted
• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position
10, 25,
(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height 32 50, 100, 53.9 48.8 53.9 41.2 53.9 28.4 66.7 19.6 66.7 18.1 66.7 19.6 — —
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting 150, 200
• Operating Range 10, 25, 50,
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No. 40 100, 150, 78.5 72.6 78.5 63.7 78.5 49.0 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5
200, 250
Spring Extend [N]
Spring force
Bore Standard
Made to Order 10 25 50 100 150 200 250
size stroke
(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.) [mm] [mm] Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod
retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended retracted extended
Symbol Specifications
10, 25,
-XA Change of rod end shape 32 50, 100, 66.7 56.3 66.7 40.7 66.7 14.7 66.7 19.6 66.7 18.1 66.7 19.6 — —
150, 200
10, 25, 50,
40 100, 150, 76.5 65.9 76.5 50.0 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5 76.5 23.5
200, 250

Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Cylinder model: CD75KE40-50SNV-B-M9BW

Precautions Double end boss-cut


Head cover E: Double end boss-cut
Mounting bracket N: Clevis
Be sure to read this before handling the Rod end Rod end bracket V: Rod end
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
products. Refer to page 219 for safety
instructions. For actuator and auto switch * M
 ounting bracket, rod end, and auto switch
precautions, refer to the “Handling are shipped together with the product.
Clevis
Precautions for SMC Products” and the
“Operation Manual” on the SMC website:
http://www.smcworld.com Auto switch

91
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75K Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories
Standard (mounted to the body) Mounting bracket (shipped together) Accessory (shipped together)
Mounting bracket/Accessory Mounting Rod end Mounting Foot/ Trunnion Trunnion Clevis pivot Clevis
Rod end
nut nut nut Flange pin washer bracket bolt
L Single foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —

C85
Mounting M Double foot V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) — — — — —
bracket G Flange V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — V (1 pc.) — — — — —

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


symbol U Trunnion V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — V (2 pcs.) V (2 pcs.) — — —
N Clevis V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — V (2 pcs.) V (1 pc.) V (2 pcs.) —
Accessory symbol V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.) — — — — — — V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.


Bore size [mm]
Mounting bracket/Accessory Contents
32 40
Rod end nut C75NT32Z C75NT40Z 1 rod end nut
Mounting nut C75SN32Z C75SN40Z 1 mounting nut
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75F32AZ C75F40AZ 1 flange, 1 foot bracket
Flange, Foot 2 flanges, 2 foot brackets,

C75
C75F32BZ C75F40BZ
(2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
Mounting
bracket Flange, Foot C75F32CZ C75F40CZ
1 flange, 1 foot bracket,

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(1 pc. with 1 mounting nut) 1 mounting nut
2 trunnion pins,
Trunnion C75T32Z C75T40Z
2 trunnion washers
1 clevis pivot bracket, 2 clevis bolts,
Clevis C75C32Z C75C40Z
2 trunnion washers
Rod end KJ10DA KJ12DA 1 rod end
Accessory
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
* Refer to page 67 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts: For Non-rotating Rod Type (K) (Only for single acting, spring extend)
Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

32 C75K-32PS Every set includes: * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
1 rod seal separately) on the sliding parts.
1 flat washer In the single acting, spring return type, there is no rod seal so
40 C75K-40PS 1 retaining ring it is not possible to replace any seals.

C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

92
C75K Series

Weights
Single Acting, Spring Return (S) [kg]
Bore size [mm] 32 40
C75KEl-lS 0.45 0.81
1 to 50 mm stroke C75KFl-lS 0.42 0.76
C75KYl-lS 0.42 0.77
C75KEl-lS 0.55 0.86
51 to 100 mm stroke C75KFl-lS 0.53 0.81
C75KYl-lS 0.53 0.81
C75KEl-lS 0.64 0.97
Without
101 to 150 mm stroke C75KFl-lS 0.62 0.92
magnet
C75KYl-lS 0.62 0.92
C75KEl-lS 0.73 1.07
151 to 200 mm stroke C75KFl-lS 0.71 1.03
C75KYl-lS 0.71 1.03
C75KEl-lS — 1.27
201 to 250 mm stroke C75KFl-lS — 1.23
Basic C75KYl-lS — 1.23
weight CD75KEl-lS 0.45 0.81
1 to 50 mm stroke CD75KFl-lS 0.43 0.77
CD75KYl-lS 0.43 0.77
CD75KEl-lS 0.56 0.86
51 to 100 mm stroke CD75KFl-lS 0.53 0.82
CD75KYl-lS 0.53 0.82
CD75KEl-lS 0.65 0.97
With
101 to 150 mm stroke CD75KFl-lS 0.62 0.93
magnet
CD75KYl-lS 0.62 0.93
CD75KEl-lS 0.74 1.08
151 to 200 mm stroke CD75KFl-lS 0.71 1.03
CD75KYl-lS 0.72 1.04
CD75KEl-lS — 1.28
201 to 250 mm stroke CD75KFl-lS — 1.23
CD75KYl-lS — 1.23
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.02 0.03
Calculation example: C75KE32-50SNV
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75FlAZ 0.11 0.2
O Basic weight··········· 0.45 kg (ø32)
Mounting Flange, Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C75FlBZ 0.25 0.46
O Additional weight···· 0.02 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
bracket Trunnion C75TlZ 0.02 0.03 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Clevis C75ClZ 0.17 0.31 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 0.17 kg
Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.45 + 0.02 x 50/10 + 0.17 + 0.07 = 0.79 kg

Single Acting, Spring Extend (T) [kg]


Bore size [mm] 32 40
C75KEl-lT 0.42 0.76
1 to 50 mm stroke
C75KFl-lT 0.39 0.72
C75KEl-lT 0.48 0.85
51 to 100 mm stroke
C75KFl-lT 0.45 0.8
Without C75KEl-lT 0.54 0.93
101 to 150 mm stroke
magnet C75KFl-lT 0.51 0.89
C75KEl-lT 0.6 1.01
151 to 200 mm stroke
C75KFl-lT 0.57 0.97
C75KEl-lT — 1.09
201 to 250 mm stroke
Basic C75KFl-lT — 1.04
weight CD75KEl-lT 0.42 0.77
1 to 50 mm stroke
CD75KFl-lT 0.4 0.73
CD75KEl-lT 0.48 0.85
51 to 100 mm stroke
CD75KFl-lT 0.46 0.81
With CD75KEl-lT 0.54 0.94
101 to 150 mm stroke
magnet CD75KFl-lT 0.52 0.89
CD75KEl-lT 0.6 1.02
151 to 200 mm stroke
CD75KFl-lT 0.58 0.98
CD75KEl-lT — 1.09
201 to 250 mm stroke
CD75KFl-lT — 1.05
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.02 0.03
Calculation example: C75KE32-50TNV
Flange, Foot (1 pc.) C75FlAZ 0.11 0.2
O Basic weight··········· 0.42 kg (ø32)
Mounting Flange, Foot (2 pcs. with 1 mounting nut) C75FlBZ 0.25 0.46
O Additional weight···· 0.02 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
bracket Trunnion C75TlZ 0.02 0.03 O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Clevis C75ClZ 0.17 0.31 O Mounting bracket: Clevis···· 0.17 kg
Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.42 + 0.02 x 50/10 + 0.17 + 0.07 = 0.76 kg
93
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Double end boss-cut
Cl75KE Bore size Stroke S l
(XC + Stroke) G

C85
(XB)
(WH) G

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


2 x BE Effective thread length FM Port EE

øD
KK

2 x øEh8

NB
øTD
Width across flats SW
Width across flats KA 1.5
AL KW 1.5 TW
AM FA 4 x TC Effective thread length FL øKV (Nut)
H S + Stroke FB
ZZ + Stroke

Boss-cut/Basic

C75
Cl75KF Bore size Stroke S l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(XB)
(WH) G Port EE G
KK BE Effective thread length FM

øD

NB
øEh8
øTD

Width across flats SW


1.5
TW Width across flats KA AL KW 2 x TC øKV (Nut)
AM FA
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE D E EE FA FB FM FL G H KA KK KV KW NB SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB) C96
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 37.5 30 G1/8 30 14 27 11 9 58 12.2 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5 17 M8 x 1 12 +0.08
0 33.1 38 47
C96Y C96K

40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 46.5 38 G1/4 35 16 32 13 12 69 14.2 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5 19 M10 x 1 14 +0.08
0 39.5 45 57

Double End Boss-cut [mm]


Item S (XC) ZZ
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 93 118 143 168 — 122 147 172 197 — 165 190 215 240 —
40 114 139 164 189 214 147 172 197 222 247 199 224 249 274 299
C55

Boss-cut/Basic [mm]
Item S ZZ
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
Products Order Switch

32 93 118 143 168 — 151 176 201 226 —


Related Made to Auto

40 114 139 164 189 214 183 208 233 258 283

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

94
C75K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return


Head cover axial port
Cl75KY Bore size Stroke S l

(XB)
(WH) G
KK BE Effective thread length FM Port EE
øD

NB
øEh8
øTD

Width across flats SW


1.5
TW Width across flats KA AL KW 2 x TC øKV (Nut)
AM FA
H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Dimensions [mm]
Bore
size
AL AM BE D E EE FA FM G H KA KK KV KW NB SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB)
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 37.5 30 G1/8 30 27 9 58 12.2 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5 17 M8 x 1 12 +0.08
0 33.1 38 47
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 46.5 38 G1/4 35 32 12 69 14.2 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5 19 M10 x 1 14 +0.08
0 39.5 45 57

Bore S ZZ
size 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 93 118 143 168 — 151 176 201 226 —
40 114 139 164 189 214 183 208 233 258 283

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

95
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl75KEl lSL/Flange: Cl75KEl lSG (With mounting bracket)


(W) LT

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
NH
LT

2 x øAB (XS)

Double foot: Cl75KEl lSM (With mounting bracket)


4x
8 x øFD
(W) LT

TF
UR
4 x øAB
NH

C75
AV TR
LT

LS + Stroke US

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(XL + Stroke) AO
 [mm]
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV FD LT NH TF TR UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 7 14 7 121 146 171 196 — 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 145 170 195 220 — 48
40 9 10 20 9 154 179 204 229 254 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 179 204 229 254 279 60

Rod trunnion: Cl75KEl lSU


(With mounting bracket)
øTDe8
TZ

Port
(XB)
C96

Head trunnion: Cl75KEl lSU øTDe8


C96Y C96K

(With mounting bracket)


TZ

C55

Port
(XC + Stroke)
 [mm]
(XC)
Products Order Switch

Bore
Related Made to Auto

size
TDe8 TZ (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 10 –0.025
–0.047 49.9 47 122 147 172 197 —
40 12 –0.032
–0.059 62.3 57 147 172 197 222 247

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

96
C75K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Return Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod clevis: Cl75KEl lSN


(With mounting bracket)
(XB)

LT
CO
CE CR 4 x øAB
CG

Head clevis: Cl75KEl lSN


(With mounting bracket) Width across
(XC + Stroke) flats CW CZ

CH
LT

CO
CE CR 4 x øAB CT
CG CU

 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 122 147 172 197 —
40 9 12 52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 147 172 197 222 247

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

97
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend


Double end boss-cut
Cl75KE Bore size Stroke T l
(XC + 2 x Stroke)

C85
(XB + Stroke)
(WH + Stroke) G

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Effective thread length FM
2 x BE Port EE

øD
KK

2 x øEh8

NB
øTD
Width across flats SW
Width across flats KA 1.5
AL KW 1.5 TW
AM FA 4 x TC Effective thread length FL øKV (Nut)
H + Stroke S + Stroke FB
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

C75
Boss-cut/Basic
Cl75KF Bore size Stroke T l

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


(XB + Stroke)
(WH + Stroke) G
Effective thread length FM
KK BE Port EE

øD

NB
øTD

Width across flats SW


øEh8

Width across flats KA 1.5


TW AL KW 2 x TC øKV (Nut)
AM FA
H + Stroke S + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

Dimensions [mm] C96


Bore
AL AM BE D E EE FA FB FM FL G H KA KK KV KW NB SW TC TD TW (WH) (XB)
C96Y C96K

size
32 17 20 M30 x 1.5 37.5 30 G1/8 30 14 27 11 9 58 12.2 M10 x 1.5 38 7 34.5 17 M8 x 1 12 +0.08
0 33.1 38 47
40 21 24 M38 x 1.5 46.5 38 G1/4 35 16 32 13 12 69 14.2 M12 x 1.75 50 8 42.5 19 M10 x 1 14 +0.08
0 39.5 45 57

Double End Boss-cut [mm]


Item S (XC) ZZ
Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
C55

32 93 118 143 168 — 122 147 172 197 — 165 190 215 240 —
40 114 139 164 189 214 147 172 197 222 247 199 224 249 274 299

Boss-cut/Basic [mm]
Products Order Switch

Item S ZZ
Related Made to Auto

Bore size Stroke 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 93 118 143 168 — 151 176 201 226 —
40 114 139 164 189 214 183 208 233 258 283

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

98
C75K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Single foot: Cl75KEl lTL/Flange: Cl75KEl lTG (With mounting bracket)


(W + Stroke) LT
NH

LT

2 x øAB
(XS + Stroke)

Double foot: Cl75KEl lTM (With mounting bracket)


4x
(W + Stroke) LT 8 x øFD

TF
UR
4 x øAB
NH

LT

AV TR
LS + Stroke US
(XL + 2 x Stroke) AO
 [mm]
Bore LS (XL)
size
AB AO AV FD LT NH TF TR UR US (W) (XS)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250 1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 7 14 7 121 146 171 196 — 4 28 28 52 49 66 34 145 170 195 220 — 48
40 9 10 20 9 154 179 204 229 254 5 33 30 60 58 80 40 179 204 229 254 279 60

Rod trunnion: Cl75KEl lTU


(With mounting bracket) øTDe8
TZ

Port
(XB + Stroke)

Head trunnion: Cl75KEl lTU øTDe8


(With mounting bracket)
TZ

Port
(XC + 2 x Stroke)
 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
TDe8 TZ (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 10 –0.025
–0.047 49.9 47 122 147 172 197 —
40 12 –0.032
–0.059 62.3 57 147 172 197 222 247

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).

99
Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend C75K Series

Dimensions: Single Acting, Spring Extend Bracket is shipped together with the product.

Rod clevis: Cl75KEl lTN


(With mounting bracket)
(XB + Stroke)

C85
C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W
LT
CO
CE CR 4 x øAB
CG

Head clevis: Cl75KEl lTN


(With mounting bracket) Width across

C75
(XC + 2 x Stroke) flats CW CZ

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


CH
LT

CO CT
CE CR 4 x øAB CU
CG

 [mm]
Bore (XC)
size
AB CE CG CH CO CR CT CU CW CZ LT (XB)
1 to 50 51 to 100 101 to 150 151 to 200 201 to 250
32 7 9 41 35 4 24 20 46.8 13 57.9 4 47 122 147 172 197 —
40 9 12 52 40 3 30 28 58.2 17 72.3 5 57 147 172 197 222 247

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint). C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

100
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount
Double Acting, Single Rod

C75R
ø32, ø40
Series
How to Order

Double acting, Single rod C D 75R A F 32 100 V B M9BW


Built-in magnet
Number of
Nil None
auto switches
D Built-in magnet
Nil 2
Type S 1
A Bottom side mounting n n
B Front side mounting
Made to order
Head cover type  For details, refer to page 102.
F Boss-cut/Basic
Y Head cover axial port Auto switch
Nil Without auto switch
Bore size * F
 or applicable auto switches,
32 32 mm refer to the table below.
40 40 mm * A
 uto switches are shipped
together with the product.
Cylinder stroke [mm]
Refer to the next page for Auto switch mounting type*1
standard strokes. B Band mounting
Accessory*1 *1 The symbol is “Nil” for no magnet.
Nil None
V Rod end
*1 R efer to Mounting Brackets/Accessories
on page 103 for details of accessories.
* Accessory is shipped together with the
product.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Pre-wired Applicable


Type Special function Band mounting 0.5 1 3 5 None connector
entry (Output) DC AC load
Perpendicular In-line (Nil) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N V V V v — v
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P V V V v — v
Solid state auto switch

——
M9BV M9B V V V v — v
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C V — V V V —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW V V V v — v
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW V V V v — v
PLC
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW V V V v — v —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗1 M9NA∗1 v v V v — v
Water-resistant 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗1 M9PA∗1 v v V v — v
(2-color indicator)
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗1 M9BA∗1 v v V v — v —
With diagnostic output (2-color indicator) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF V — V v — v IC circuit
3-wire 5V — A96V A96 V — V — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

(NPN equivalent) —
Yes
— 200 V — — V — V — — —
Grommet —
—— 100 V A93V∗2 A93 V V V V — —
No 100 V or less A90V A90 V — V — — — IC circuit Relay,
2-wire 12 V
Yes 24 V — — C73C V — V V V — — PLC
Connector No 24 V or less — C80C V — V V V — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator) Grommet Yes — — — — V — V — — — —
∗1 W
 ater-resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please contact SMC regarding water-resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗2 1 m lead wire is only applicable to the D-A93.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··················
Nil (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
M (Example) M9NWM
1 m·················· None··············· N (Example) H7CN
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 115 for details.
∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “v” are produced upon receipt of order.
∗ D-A9l/M9l/A7l/A80lF7l/J7l auto switches are shipped together, but not assembled. (For band mounting, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
101
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount
Double Acting, Single Rod C75R Series

Specifications

Square rod cover makes direct Bore size [mm] 32 40


mounting possible Type Pneumatic
Space saving Action Double acting, Single rod

C85
Because it is a directly mounted type without using Fluid Air
brackets, its overall length is shorter, and its installation Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
pitch can be made smaller. Thus, the space that is Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


required for installation has been dramatically reduced. Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
2 mounting types Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20°C to 80°C (No freezing)
Front side mounting and bottom side mounting available temperature With auto switch: –10°C to 60°C (No freezing)
to suit your applications. Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
+1.4
Stroke length tolerance  0  mm
Piston speed 50 to 1500 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper
Allowable kinetic energy 0.65 J 1.2 J

Standard Strokes

C75
Bore size Max. stroke*2
Standard stroke [mm]*1
[mm] [mm]
32 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


300
40 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 300
*1 Other strokes are available on request.
*2 For exceeding the standard stroke range, it will be available as a special order (-X2018).

Option: Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Cylinder model: CD75RAF40-50V-B-M9BW


Bottom side mounting Front side mounting
Rod end
Mounting A: Bottom side mounting
Symbol Bottom side mounting
Rod end bracket V: Rod end
Auto switch D-M9BW: Band mounting, 2 pcs.
Double acting, Single rod
* R
 od end and auto switch are shipped
together with the product.

Auto switch
C96
Refer to pages 105 to 115 for cylinders with
auto switches.
C96Y C96K

• Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position Precautions


(Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
• Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting Be sure to read this before handling the products. Refer to page 219 for
• Operating Range safety instructions. For actuator and auto switch precautions, refer to
• Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No. the “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the “Operation
C55

Manual” on the SMC website: http://www.smcworld.com

Made to Order
Products Order Switch

(For details, refer to pages 119 to 124.)


Related Made to Auto

Symbol Specifications
-XA Change of rod end shape
-XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)*1
-XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder (–40 to 70°C)*1
-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)
-XC6A Made of stainless steel
*1 Excludes with rod end (Accessory)

102 A
C75R Series

Mounting Brackets/Accessories

Standard (mounted to the body) Accessory (shipped together)


Mounting bracket/Accessory
Rod end nut Rod end
Accessory symbol V Rod end V (1 pc.) V (1 pc.)

Mounting Bracket/Accessory Part Nos.

Bore size [mm]


Description Contents
32 40
Rod end KJ10DA KJ12DA 1 rod end
Accessory
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
* Refer to page 67 for dimensions of accessories.

Replacement Parts
Bore size [mm] Part no. Note

32 C75A-32PS Every set includes:


1 rod seal
1 flat washer * When replacing the seals, use grease (GR-S-010: ordered
40 C75A-40PS 1 retaining ring separately) on the sliding parts.

Weights
[kg]
Bore size [mm] 32 40
C75RAF 0.35 0.69
C75RAY 0.35 0.69
Without magnet
C75RBF 0.35 0.68
Basic C75RBY 0.35 0.69
weight CD75RAF 0.35 0.69
CD75RAY 0.36 0.69
With magnet
CD75RBF 0.36 0.69 Calculation example: C75RAF32-50V
CD75RBY 0.36 0.69 O Basic weight··········· 0.35 kg (ø32)
Additional weight per 10 mm of stroke 0.02 0.03 O Additional weight···· 0.02 kg (at 10 mm stroke)
O Cylinder stroke··················· 50 mm
Rod end KJlDA 0.07 0.11 O Accessory: Rod end··········· 0.07 kg
Accessory
Floating joint JAl-l-l 0.07 0.16 0.35 + 0.02 x 50/10 + 0.07 = 0.52 kg

103
Air Cylinder: Direct Mount
Double Acting, Single Rod C75R Series

Dimensions
Bottom side mounting: Cl75RAF/Y Bore size Stroke B

(XB)
G1 G2

C85
2 x øLD
(WH) Port 2 x EE

øD

øD
KK

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


øND

NB

NB
øC
B
LH

Width across flats SW


Width across flats KA AL 3
LX AM K N1 N2 NB NB
L H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke Boss-cut/Basic Head cover
axial port

Dimensions [mm]
Bore size AL AM B C D EE G1 G2 H K KA KK L LD LH
32 17 20 42.3 12 37.5 G1/8 22 9 36 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 47 ø9, ø14 counterbore depth 10 21
40 21 24 52.3 14 46.5 G1/4 27 12 40 7 12 M12 x 1.75 58.5 ø11, ø17.5 counterbore depth 12.5 26

C75
Bore size LX N1 N2 NB ND S SW (WH) (XB) ZZ

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


32 30 29 17 34.5 0
26–0.033 80 17 16 28 116
40 38 38 22 42.5 0
32–0.039 105 19 16 31 145

Front side mounting: Cl75RBF/Y Bore size Stroke B

(WH) G1 G2
4 x FF
Port 2 x EE
øD
øD

KK
øND

NB

NB
FX

øC
F

Width across flats SW


Width across flats KA AL 3
FX AM K N1 N2 NB NB
F H S + Stroke
Boss-cut/Basic Head cover C96
ZZ + Stroke
axial port
C96Y C96K

Dimensions [mm]
Bore size AL AM C D EE F FF FX G1 G2 H K KA KK N1 N2 NB ND S SW (WH) ZZ
32 17 20 12 37.5 G1/8 42.4 M6 x 1 depth 11 30 22 9 36 5.5 10 M10 x 1.5 29 17 34.5 0
26–0.033 80 17 16 116
40 21 24 14 46.5 G1/4 52.4 M8 x 1.25 depth 14 36 27 12 40 7 12 M12 x 1.75 38 22 42.5 0
32–0.039 105 19 16 145
C55

Refer to page 67 of Standard Type Single Rod for details of


accessories (rod end, floating joint).
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

104
C85/C75 Series
Auto Switch Mounting
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD85l
Double acting/Single acting: Band mounting Double acting/Single acting: Rail mounting
D-M9l 17 D-M9l
D-M9lW D-M9lW
D-M9lA D-M9lA
D-A9l D-A9l

≈ Hs

≈ Hs
A B A B

D-M9lV 17 D-M9lV
D-M9lWV D-M9lWV
D-M9lAV D-M9lAV
D-A9lV D-A9lV
A B
≈ Hs

≈ Hs
A B

D-H7l D-F7l D-F7BA


17 11 11
D-H7lW D-F7lW D-F79F
D-H7BA D-J79 D-A7lH
D-H7NF D-J79W D-A80H
D-C7l
≈ Hs

≈ Hs
A B A B
D-C80

D-H7C 17 D-F7lV 11 11
D-F7lWV
D-F7BAV
D-A7l
≈ Hs

≈ Hs

A B A B
D-A80
D-A79W

D-C73C D-J79C 13.3 13.3


D-C80C D-A73C ø10
17
D-A80C

A B
≈ Hs

≈ Hs

A B

105
Auto Switch Mounting C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD75l

C85
Double acting/Single acting: Band mounting Double acting/Single acting: Rail mounting
D-M9l 17 D-M9l

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


D-M9lW D-M9lW
D-M9lA D-M9lA
D-A9l D-A9l
A B A B

≈ Hs

≈ Hs
D-M9lV 17 D-M9lV
D-M9lWV D-M9lWV
D-M9lAV D-M9lAV

C75
D-A9lV D-A9lV
A B A B
≈ Hs

≈ Hs

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


D-H7l 17 D-F7l D-F7BA
D-H7lW D-F7lW D-F79F
D-H7BA D-J79 D-A7lH
D-H7NF D-J79W D-A80H
D-C7l A B A B
≈ Hs

≈ Hs
D-C80

D-H7C 17 D-F7lV
D-F7lWV C96
D-F7BAV
C96Y C96K

D-A7l
A B D-A80 A B
≈ Hs

≈ Hs

D-A79W
C55

D-C73C 17 D-J79C
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

D-C80C D-A73C
D-A80C
A B A B
≈ Hs

≈ Hs

106
C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD85 (Double acting, Single rod), CD85W (Double acting, Double rod),
CD85K (Non-rotating rod), CD85R (Direct mount)
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position [mm] [mm]
Auto Band mounting Auto Rail mounting
switch switch D-F7l/J79
model model D-F7lW/J79W
D-M9l D-M9l D-F7lV
D-H7l
D-M9lV D-C7l D-M9lV D-F7lWV
D-H7C
D-M9lW D-A9l D-C80 D-M9lW D-A9l D-F79F/J79C D-A73
D-H7lW D-A79W
D-M9lWV D-A9lV D-C73C D-M9lWV D-A9lV D-F7BA D-A80
D-H7BA D-F7BAV
D-M9lA D-C80C D-M9lA
D-H7NF D-A72/A7lH
D-M9lAV D-M9lAV
D-A80H
Bore Bore D-A73C/A80C
size A B A B A B A B size A B A B A B A B A B
8 6.5 6.5 — — 2 2 3 3 8 5 5 — — 4 4 3.5 3.5 — —
6.5 6.5 2 2 3 3 5 5 4 4 3.5 3.5
10 (7) (7)
— —
(2.5) (2.5) (3.5) (3.5)
10 (5.5) (5.5)
— —
(4.5) (4.5) (4) (4)
— —

7.5 7.5 3 3 4 4 6 6 5 5 4.5 4.5


12 (8.5) (8.5)
— —
(4) (4) (5) (5)
12 (7) (7)
— —
(6) (6) (5.5) (5.5)
— —

13.5 9.5 9 10 12 9.5 11 10.5 8


7.5 3.5 3 4 6 3.5 5 4.5 2
16 (8.5)
(10.5)
(4.5)
(6.5)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(7) 16 (7)
(9)
(4.5)
(6.5)
(6)
(8)
(5.5)
(7.5)
(3)
(5)
[7.5] [3.5] [3] [4] [6] [3.5] [5] [4.5] [2]
10.5 9.5 6.5 5.5 6 5 7 6 6.5 5.5 8 7 7.5 6.5 5 4
20 (8.5) (7.5) (4.5) (3.5) (4) (3) (5) (4)
20 — —
(4.5) (3.5) (6) (5) (5.5) (4.5) (3) (2)
12 11 8 7 7.5 6.5 8.5 7.5 8 7 9.5 8.5 9 8 6.5 5.5
25 (10) (9) (6) (5) (5.5) (4.5) (6.5) (5.5)
25 — —
(6) (5) (7.5) (6.5) (7) (6) (4.5) (3.5)
* The value in ( ) is in cases with air cushion. * The value in ( ) is in cases with air cushion.
* The value in [ ] is in cases of CD85F16, CD85Y. * The value in [ ] is in cases of CD85F16, CD85Y.
* D
 -A9l type cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, * D-A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.
or ø12 cylinder. * D-M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted on bore size ø20 or ø25
* A
 djust the auto switch after confirming the operating cylinder.
conditions in the actual setting. * No rail mounting is available with CD85R (direct mount type).
* Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.

Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm] [mm]


Auto Band mounting Auto Rail mounting
switch switch
model model
D-M9l*1 D-F7l
D-H7l D-M9lV D-J79
D-M9l D-M9lV D-H7lW D-M9lW D-F7lW
D-F7lV *2
D-M9lW D-M9lWV D-H7BA D-C73C D-M9lWV D-J79W D-F7lWV D-A7l D-A73C
D-H7C D-J79C
D-M9lA D-M9lAV D-H7NF D-C80C D-M9lA D-F79F D-A80 D-A80C D-A79W
D-A9l*1 D-A9lV*1 D-C7l D-F7BAV
D-M9lAV D-F7BA
D-C80 D-A9l*2 D-A7lH
D-A9lV D-A80H
Bore Bore
size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
8 16 16.5 17 19 18.5 8 16 16 19 21 16 22.5 —
10 17.5 18 18 20 19.5 10 17 17 20 22 17 23.5 —
12 18.5 19 19 21 20.5 12 20.5 20.5 23 25 19.5 26.5 —
16 20.5 21 21 23 22.5 16 20.5 20.5 23 25 19.5 26.5 22
20 24.5 24.5 24.5 25.5 25 20 23.5 23.5 26 29 22.5 29.5 25
25 27 27 27 27.5 27 25 26.5 26.5 29 32 25.5 32.5 28
*1 D
 -A9l(V) type cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, *1 D -M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted on bore size ø20 or ø25
ø10, or ø12 cylinder. cylinder.
*2 D-A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.
*3 No rail mounting is available with CD85R (direct mount type).

107
Auto Switch Mounting C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD75 (Double acting, Single rod), CD75W (Double acting, Double rod),
CD75K (Non-rotating rod), CD75R (Direct mount)
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position [mm]

C85
Auto D-M9l D-A7lH/A80H/A72
switch D-H7l
D-M9lV D-C7l D-A73C/A80C
model D-H7C

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


D-M9lW D-A9l D-C80 D-A73 D-F7l/J79
D-H7lW D-A79W
D-M9lWV D-A9lV D-C73C D-A80 D-F7lW/J79W
D-H7BAL
D-M9lA D-C80C D-J79C/F7BAL
D-H7NF
Bore D-M9lAV D-F79F
size A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
8 7 8.5 7.5 9 8 7 6 6 5
32 11.5 10.5 7.5 6.5
(6) (5) (6.5) (5.5) (7) (6) (5) (4) (4) (3)
14 12 14.5 12.5 15 13 13 11 12 10
40 17.5 15.5 13.5 11.5
(11) (9) (11.5) (9.5) (12) (10) (10) (8) (9) (7)
* The value in ( ) is for air cushion.
* T
 he above-mentioned value is a guide for auto switch mounting positions for stroke end detection.
Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
* A/B dimensions are the distance from the cover to the end surface of the auto switch.

Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm]

C75
Auto D-M9l
switch D-M9lV D-C7l/C80 D-F7l/J79
model D-M9lW
D-H7l D-F7lW

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


D-M9lWV D-C73C D-A7l D-A7lH D-A73C
D-H7lW D-J79W D-H7C D-A79W D-J79C
D-M9lA D-C80C D-A80 D-A80H D-A80C
D-M9lAV D-H7BAL D-F7BAL
D-A9l D-H7NF D-F79F
Bore D-A9lV
size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
32 30.5 30.5 31 30 30.5 30 36 31.5 31.5 34.5
40 35.5 35.5 35 34.5 35 34.5 40.5 35.5 36 39

C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

108
C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD85l-lS (Single acting, Spring return)
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position [mm] [mm]
Auto switch Bore A dimensions Auto switch Bore A dimensions
B B
model size 5 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 150 st model size 5 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 150 st
8 18.5 18.5 18.5 6.5 D-M9l 8 17 17 17 5
10 16.5 16.5 16.5 6.5 D-M9lV 10 15 15 15 5
D-M9l 12 18 18 18 7.5 D-M9lW 12 16.5 16.5 16.5 6
D-M9lV D-M9lWV
13.5 D-M9lA 12
D-M9lW 16 18 33.5 49 16 16.5 32 47.5
[7.5] D-M9lAV [6]
D-M9lWV
D-M9lA 10.5 8
20 (35.5)
60.5 85.5 9.5 16 12.5 28 43.5
[2]
D-M9lAV D-A9l
10.5 5
25 (35.5)
60.5 85.5 11 D-A9lV 20 (30)
55 80 4
D-A79W
9.5 5
16 14 29.5 45
[3.5]
25 (30)
55 80 5.5

6.5 D-F7l/J79 8 16 16 16 4
D-A9l 20 56.5 81.5 5.5 D-F7lW
(31.5) 10 14 14 14 4

Rail mounting
6.5
D-J79W 12 15.5 15.5 15.5 5
25 56.5 81.5 7 D-F7lV
Band mounting

(31.5) D-F7lWV 11
16 15.5 31 46.5
8 14 14 14 2 D-F79F/J79C [5]
10 12 12 12 2 D-F7BA 8
D-F7BAV 20 58 83 7
D-H7l 12 13.5 13.5 13.5 3
D-A72
(33)
D-H7C 16 13.5 29 44.5
9 D-A7lH/A80H 25
8
58 83 8.5
D-H7lW [3] D-A73C/A80C (33)
D-H7BA 6 8 15.5 15.5 15.5 3.5
D-H7NF 20 56 81 5
(31) 10 13.5 13.5 13.5 3.5
6 12 15 15 15 4.5
25 (31)
56 81 6.5
10.5
D-A73 16 15 30.5 46
8 15 15 15 3 [4.5]
D-A80
10 13 13 13 3 7.5
20 57.5 82.5 6.5
12 14.5 14.5 14.5 4 (32.5)
D-C7l 10 7.5
D-C80 16 14.5 30 45.5
[4]
25 (32.5)
57.5 82.5 8
D-C73C
D-C80C 7
20 (32)
57 82 6

7
25 (32)
57 82 7.5

* The value in ( ) is in cases of non-rotating.


* The value in [ ] is in cases of CD85F16, CD85Y.
* D-A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.
* When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25 cylinder, D-M9l(V), M9lW(V) and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted.
* Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.

Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm] [mm]


Auto Band mounting Auto Rail mounting
switch switch
D-M9l*1 D-F7l
model model
D-H7l D-M9lV D-J79
D-M9l D-M9lV D-H7lW D-M9lW D-F7lW
D-F7lV *2
D-M9lW D-M9lWV D-H7BA D-C73C D-M9lWV D-J79W D-A7l D-A73C
D-H7C D-F7lWV D-J79C D-A79W
D-M9lA D-M9lAV D-H7NF D-C80C D-M9lA D-F79F D-A80 D-A80C
D-F7BAV
D-A9l*1 D-A9lV*1 D-C7l D-M9lAV D-F7BA
D-C80 D-A9l*2 D-A7lH
Bore Bore D-A9lV D-A80H
size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
8 16 16.5 17 19 18.5 8 16 16 19 21 16 22.5 —
10 17.5 18 18 20 19.5 10 17 17 20 22 17 23.5 —
12 18.5 19 19 21 21 12 20.5 20.5 23 25 19.5 26.5 —
16 20.5 21 21 23 23 16 20.5 20.5 23 25 19.5 26.5 22
20 24.5 24.5 24.5 25 25 20 23.5 23.5 26 29 22.5 29.5 25
25 27 27 27 27.5 27.5 25 26.5 26.5 29 32 25.5 32.5 28
*1 D
 -A9l(V) type cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, *1 D -M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted on bore size ø20 or ø25
ø10, or ø12 cylinder. cylinder.
*2 D-A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.

109
Auto Switch Mounting C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD75l-lS (Single acting, Spring return)
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position [mm]
Single acting, Spring return
Auto switch Bore

C85
A dimensions
model size B
1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 150 st 151 to 200 st 151 to 200 st
D-M9l 11.5

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


D-M9lV 32 (36.5)
61.5 86.5 111.5 136.5 10.5
D-M9lW
D-M9lWV 16.5
D-M9lA 40 66.5 91.5 116.5 141.5 15.5
D-M9lAV (41.5)
7.5
32 (32.5)
57.5 82.5 107.5 132.5 6.5
D-A9l
D-A9lV 12.5
40 (37.5)
62.5 87.5 112.5 137.5 11.5

8
32 58 83 108 — 7
D-C7l/C80 (33)
D-C73C/C80C 13
40 (38)
63 88 113 138 12

8.5
32 (33.5)
58.5 83.5 108.5 — 7.5
D-A73
D-A80 13.5
40 (38.5)
63.5 88.5 113.5 138.5 12.5

C75
D-A72/A7lH/A80H 9
D-A73C/A80C 32 59 84 109 — 8
D-F7l/F7lW (34)

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


D-J79/J79W
D-F7lWV 14
D-J79C 40 (39)
64 89 114 139 13
D-F7BAL, D-F79F
6
32 (31)
56 81 106 — 5
D-A79WL
11
40 (36)
61 86 111 136 10

7
32 57 82 107 — 6
D-H7l/H7C/H7lW (32)
D-H7BAL, D-H7NF 12
40 (37)
62 87 112 137 11

* The value in ( ) is for air cushion.


* T
 he above-mentioned value is a guide for auto switch mounting positions for stroke end detection.
Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
* A/B dimensions are the distance from the cover to the end surface of the auto switch.

Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm]


Auto D-M9l
switch D-M9lV D-C7l/C80 D-F7l/J79
model D-M9lW D-H7l D-F7lW
D-M9lWV D-H7lW D-C73C D-A7l D-A7lH D-A73C
D-M9lA D-C80C D-A80 D-A80H
D-J79W
D-A80C
D-H7C D-A79W D-J79C C96
D-M9lAV D-H7BAL D-F7BAL
D-A9l D-H7NF D-F79F
C96Y C96K

Bore D-A9lV
size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
32 30.5 30.5 31 30 30.5 30 36 31.5 31.5 34.5
40 35.5 35.5 35 34.5 35 34.5 40.5 35.5 36 39
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

110
C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD85l-lT (Single acting, Spring extend)
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position [mm] [mm]
Auto switch Bore B dimensions Auto switch Bore B dimensions
A A
model size 5 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 150 st model size 5 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 150 st
8 6.5 31 31 31 D-M9l 8 5 29.5 29.5 29.5
D-M9l 10 6.5 29 29 29 D-M9lV 10 5 27.5 27.5 27.5
D-M9lV 12 7.5 31 31 31 D-M9lW 12 6 29.5 29.5 29.5
D-M9lW D-M9lWV
36 62 88 D-M9lA 34.5 60.5 86.5
D-M9lWV 16 7.5 16 6
D-M9lA [30] [56] [82] D-M9lAV [28.5] [54.5] [80.5]
D-M9lAV 20 10.5 34.5 59.5 84.5 30.5 56.5 82.5
D-A9l 16 2
25 12 34.5 59.5 84.5 [24.5] [50.5] [76.5]
D-A9lV
32 58 84
D-A79W 20 5 29 54 79
16 3.5
D-A9l [26] [52] [80] 25 6.5 29 54 79
D-A9lV 20 6.5 30.5 55.5 80.5 D-F7l/J79 8 4 28.5 28.5 28.5
D-F7lW
Band mounting

25 8 30.5 55.5 80.5

Rail mounting
D-J79W 10 4 26.5 26.5 26.5
8 2 26.5 26.5 26.5
D-F7lV 12 5 28.5 28.5 28.5
D-H7l 10 2 24.5 24.5 24.5 D-F7lWV
D-H7C 12 3 26.5 26.5 26.5 D-F79F/J79C 33.5 59.5 85.5
D-H7lW D-F7BA 16 5
[27.5] [53.5] [79.5]
31.5 57.5 83.5
D-H7BA 16 3
[25.5] [51.5] [77.5]
D-F7BAV
D-A72 20 8 32 57 82
D-H7NF 20 6 30 55 80 D-A7lH/A80H
25 7.5 30 55 80 D-A73C/A80C 25 9.5 32 57 82
8 3 27.5 27.5 27.5 8 3.5 28 28 28
10 3 25.5 25.5 25.5 10 3.5 26 26 26
D-C7l 12 4 27.5 27.5 27.5 12 4.5 28 28 28
D-C80 D-A73
32.5 58.5 84.5 33 59 85
D-C73C 16 4 D-A80 16 4.5
[26.5] [52.5] [78.5] [27] [53] [79]
D-C80C
20 7 31 56 81 20 7.5 31.5 56.5 81.5
25 8.5 31 56 81 25 9 31.5 56.5 81.5
* The value in [ ] is in cases of CD85F16, CD85Y.
* D-A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.
* When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25 cylinder, D-M9l(V), M9lW(V) and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted.
* Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.

Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm] [mm]


Auto Band mounting Auto Rail mounting
switch switch
D-M9l*1 D-F7l
model model
D-H7l D-M9lV D-J79
D-M9l D-M9lV D-H7lW D-M9lW D-F7lW
D-F7lV *2
D-M9lW D-M9lWV D-H7BA D-C73C D-M9lWV D-J79W D-A7l D-A73C
D-H7C D-F7lWV D-J79C D-A79W
D-M9lA D-M9lAV D-H7NF D-C80C D-M9lA D-F79F D-A80 D-A80C
D-A9l*1 D-A9lV*1 D-C7l D-F7BAV
D-M9lAV D-F7BA
D-C80 D-A9l*2 D-A7lH
Bore Bore D-A9lV D-A80H
size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
8 16 16.5 17 19 18.5 8 16 16 19 21 16 22.5 —
10 17.5 18 18 20 19.5 10 17 17 20 22 17 23.5 —
12 18.5 19 19 21 20.5 12 20.5 20.5 23 25 19.5 26.5 —
16 20.5 21 21 23 22.5 16 20.5 20.5 23 25 19.5 26.5 22
20 24.5 24.5 24.5 25.5 25 20 23.5 23.5 26 29 22.5 29.5 25
25 27 27 27 27.5 27 25 26.5 26.5 29 32 25.5 32.5 28
*1 D
 -A9l(V) type cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, *1 D -M9l(V), M9lW(V), and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted on bore size ø20 or ø25
ø10, or ø12 cylinder. cylinder.
*2 D-A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.

111
Auto Switch Mounting C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Mounting Height
Applicable series: CD75l-lT (Single acting, Spring extend)
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position [mm]
Single acting, Spring extend
Auto switch Bore

C85
B dimensions
model size A
1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 150 st 151 to 200 st 151 to 200 st
D-M9l

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


D-M9lV 32 11.5 35.5 60.5 85.5 110.5 —
D-M9lW
D-M9lWV
D-M9lA 40 16.5 40.5 65.5 90.5 115.5 140.5
D-M9lAV
D-A9l 32 7.5 31.5 56.5 81.5 106.5 —
D-A9lV 40 12.5 36.5 61.5 86.5 111.5 136.5
D-C7l/C80 32 8 32 57 82 107 —
D-C73C/C80C 40 13 37 62 87 112 137
D-A73 32 8.5 32.5 57.5 82.5 107.5 —
D-A80 40 13.5 37.5 62.5 87.5 112.5 137.5
D-A72/A7lH/A80H
D-A73C/A80C 32 9 33 58 83 108 —
D-F7l/F7lW
D-J79/J79W
D-F7lWV
D-J79C 40 14 38 63 88 113 138
D-F7BAL, D-F79F

C75
32 6 30 55 80 105 —
D-A79WL
40 11 35 60 85 110 135

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


D-H7l/H7C/H7lW 32 7 31 56 81 106 —
D-H7BAL, D-H7NF 40 12 36 61 86 111 136
* The value in ( ) is for air cushion.
* The above-mentioned value is a guide for auto switch mounting positions for stroke end detection.
Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating conditions in the actual setting.
* A/B dimensions are the distance from the cover to the end surface of the auto switch.

Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm]


Auto D-M9l [mm]
switch D-M9lV D-C7l/C80 D-F7l/J79
model D-M9lW D-H7l D-F7lW
D-M9lWV D-H7lW D-C73C D-A7l D-A7lH D-A73C
D-M9lA D-J79W D-H7C D-A79W D-J79C
D-C80C D-A80 D-A80H D-A80C
D-M9lAV D-H7BAL D-F7BAL
D-A9l D-H7NF D-F79F
Bore D-A9lV
size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
32 30.5 30.5 31 30 30.5 30 36 31.5 31.5 34.5
40 35.5 35.5 35 34.5 35 34.5 40.5 35.5 36 39

C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

112
C85/C75 Series

Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting


C85: ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16 n: Number of auto switches [mm] C85: ø20, ø25 n: Number of auto switches [mm]
Number of auto switches Number of auto switches
Auto switch 2 n Auto switch 2 n
model 1 Different Same ø8 to ø16 model 1 Different Same ø20, ø25
surfaces surface Different surfaces Same surface surfaces surface Different surfaces Same surface
D-M9l D-M9l
D-M9lV D-M9lV
D-M9lW D-M9lW
D-M9lWV *1 *1 15 + 35 (n – 2) 45 + 15 (n – 2) D-M9lWV *1 *1 45 + 45 (n – 2)
10 15 45 2 10 15 45
D-M9lA (n = 2, 4, 6···) (n = 2, 4, 6···) D-M9lA (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-M9lAV D-M9lAV
D-A9l*2 D-A9l
D-A9lV D-A9lV (n – 2)
Band mounting

Band mounting
15 + 45 2
(n – 2)
D-C7l 10 15 50
15 + 40
2
50 + 20 (n – 2) D-C7l 10 15 50
(n = 2, 4, 6···) 50 + 45 (n – 2)
D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···)
(n = 2, 4, 6···) D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···)

D-H7l (n – 2) D-H7l
D-H7lW 10 15 60
15 + 45
2
60 + 22.5 (n – 2) D-H7lW 10 15 60
60 + 45 (n – 2)
D-H7BA (n=2, 4, 6···)
(n = 2, 4, 6···) D-H7BA (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-H7NF D-H7NF
D-H7C (n – 2) D-H7C (n – 2)
15 + 50 50 + 27.5 (n – 2) 15 + 50 2 65 + 50 (n – 2)
D-C73C 10 15 65 2
(n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-C73C 10 15 65
(n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-C80C (n = 2, 4, 6···) D-C80C (n = 2, 4, 6···)
D-M9lV D-F7lV 5 — 5 —
10 + 10 (n – 2)
10 + 10 (n – 2)
D-F7lV 5 — 5 —
(n = 4, 6···)
D-J79C (n = 4, 6···)
D-J79C D-F7l 15 + 15 (n – 2)
5 — 5 —
D-F7l 15 + 15 (n – 2) D-J79 (n = 4, 6···)
5 — 5 —
D-J79 (n = 4, 6···) D-A9l 10 + 15 (n – 2)
5 — 10 —
10 + 15 (n – 2) D-A9lV (n = 4, 6···)
D-A9lV*2 5 — 10 —
(n = 4, 6···) D-A7l
Rail mounting

D-A7l D-A80 5 — 10 —
15 + 10 (n – 2)
D-A80 15 + 10 (n – 2) D-A73C (n = 4, 6···)
5 — 10 —
D-A73C (n = 4, 6···) D-A80C
D-A80C D-A7lH 15 + 15 (n – 2)
5 — 10 —
D-A7lH 15 + 15 (n – 2) D-A80H (n = 4, 6···)
Rail mounting

5 — 10 —
D-A80H (n = 4, 6···) D-F7lWV 10 + 15 (n – 2)
D-M9l 10 — 10 —
15 + 15 (n – 2) D-F7BAV 10 — 15 —
(n = 4, 6···)
D-A9l*2 (n = 4, 6···) D-A79W
D-F7lWV 10 + 15 (n – 2) D-F7lW 15 + 20 (n – 2)
D-F7BAV 10 — 15 —
(n = 4, 6···) D-J79W 10 — 15 —
(n = 4, 6···)
D-A79W*2 D-F7BA
D-M9lWV 10 — 15 —
15 + 15 (n – 2)
D-M9lAV (n = 4, 6···)
D-F7lW 15 + 20 (n – 2)
D-J79W 10 — 15 —
(n = 4, 6···)
D-F7BA
15 + 15 (n – 2)
D-M9lW 15 — 15 —
(n = 4, 6···)
20 + 15 (n – 2)
D-M9lA 15 — 20 —
(n = 4, 6···)
*1 Auto switch mounting (With the stroke range within the below, an adjustment is required as shown in the chart below).
With 2 auto switches
Different surfaces*1 Same surface*1
A
A-6 6
15

Auto switch model

Auto switch
D-M9 6 B-6
D-M9W B
The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a
The proper auto switch mounting position is 6 mm inward from direction (cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the
the switch holder edge. auto switch and lead wire do not interfere with each other.
D-A93 — 45 to less than 50 strokes
D-M9l/M9lW 15 to less than 20 strokes 45 to less than 55 strokes
*2 D
 -A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.
* W
 hen mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25 cylinder, D-M9l(V), M9lW(V) and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted.

113
Auto Switch Mounting C85/C75 Series

Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting


C75: ø32, ø40 n: Number of auto switches [mm]
Number of auto switches
Auto switch 2 n
model 1 Different Same ø32, ø40

C85
surfaces surface Different surfaces Same surface
D-C73, D-C80
D-H7A1, D-H7A2 10 15 50 50 + 45 (n – 2)

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


D-H7B
Band mounting

D-C73C (n – 2)
15 + 45
D-C80C 10 15 65 2 65 + 50 (n – 2)
D-H7C (n = 2, 4···)

D-H7NW
D-H7PW 10 15 75 75 + 55 (n – 2)
D-H7BW
D-A73, D-A80
D-A73H, D-A80H
Rail mounting

D-A73C, D-A80C 5 — 10 —
D-F79, D-J79 (n – 2)
15 + 35 2
D-F7P, D-J79C
(n = 2, 4···)
D-A79W, D-F79W
D-F7PW 10 — 15 —

C75
D-J79W

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Operating Range
[mm]
Bore size
Auto switch model
8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40
D-M9l
D-M9lV
D-M9lW 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 3
D-M9lWV
D-M9lA
D-M9lAV
D-A9l*1 — — — 7 6 6 6 6
Band D-A9lV*1
mounting D-H7l
D-H7lW 3 3 3 4 4 4 4.5 5
D-H7BA
D-H7NF
D-H7C 8 8 8 9 7 8.5 9 10
D-C7l/C80 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8
D-C73C/C80C
D-M9l/M9lV*2, 3
D-M9lW/M9lWV*2, 3 2.5 3 3.5 3.5 — — — — C96
D-M9lA/M9lAV*2, 3
D-A9l*1, 3
C96Y C96K

— — — 6.5 5.5 6 — —
D-A9lV*1, 3
D-F7l/J79
Rail
D-F7lV/J79C
mounting
D-F7lW/J79W 5 5 6 5 5 6 4.5 4.5
D-F7lWV
D-F79F
D-F7BA/F7BAV
C55

D-A7l/A80
D-A7lH/A80H 8 8 9 9 7 7 7.5 7.5
D-A73C/A80C
D-A79W*1
Products Order Switch

— — — 13 10 10.5 11.5 11.5


Related Made to Auto

*1 D -A9l(V) and A79W types cannot be mounted on bore size ø8, ø10, or ø12 cylinder.
*2 W hen mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25 cylinder, D-M9l(V), M9lW(V) and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted.
*3 W hen mounting a rail on bore size ø32 or ø40 cylinder, D-M9l(V), M9lW(V), M9lA(V) and A9l(V) types cannot be mounted.
* V
 alues which include hysteresis are for guideline purposes only, they are not a guarantee (assuming approximately ±30% dispersion) and may change
substantially depending on the ambient environment.

114
C85/C75 Series

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Set Part Nos.


C85 Series C75 Series
Auto switch
Auto switch model Bore size [mm]
mounting
ø8 ø10 ø12 ø16 ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
D-M9l(V) BJ6-008 BJ6-010 BJ6-012 BJ6-016 BM5-020 BM5-025 BM5-032 BM5-040
D-M9lW(V) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d)
D-A9l(V)*7
BJ6-008S BJ6-010S BJ6-012S BJ6-016S BM5-020S BM5-025S BM5-032S BM5-040S
D-M9lA(V) (A set of a, b, c, e) (A set of a, b, c, e) (A set of a, b, c, e) (A set of a, b, c, e) (A set of a, b, c, e) (A set of a, b, c, e) (A set of a, b, c, e) (A set of a, b, c, e)
(Screw: Stainless steel) (Screw: Stainless steel) (Screw: Stainless steel) (Screw: Stainless steel) (Screw: Stainless steel) (Screw: Stainless steel) (Screw: Stainless steel) (Screw: Stainless steel)
*1 Switch bracket (Resin)
*2 d Transparent (Nylon)∗1
*3
*4 e White (PBT) b
Band
c Auto switch mounting screw
mounting Switch holder (Zinc die-casted)
a
Auto switch mounting band

D-C7l/C80
D-C73C/C80C BJ2-008 BJ2-010 BJ2-012 BJ2-016 BM2-020A BM2-025A BM2-032A BM2-040A
D-H7l/H7lW (A set of a and b) (A set of a and b) (A set of a and b) (A set of a and b) (A set of a and b) (A set of a and b) (A set of a and b) (A set of a and b)
D-H7BA/H7NF
D-M9l(V)*8
D-M9lW(V)*8 BQ2-012 (S)
D-M9lA(V)*8 (A set of f and g)
D-A9l(V)*7
*5 f
Set screw
*6 Auto switch mounting bracket
Rail (Unused)
mounting Bracket fixing screw
g
(Cylinder accessory)
Auto switch mounting screw
Nut
(Cylinder accessory)
*1 S ince the switch bracket for band mounting (made from nylon) are affected in an environment where alcohol, chloroform, methylamines, hydrochloric
acid or sulfuric acid is splashed over, so it cannot be used. Please contact SMC regarding other chemicals.
*2 In the case of band mounting auto switches, make sure the indicator LED is not directly below switch mounting bracket when mounted as the protruding
LED may be damaged.
*3 For band mounting, switch brackets are mounted on the cylinder when small switches are specified. (switches are not mounted, but packaged together).
*4 For band mounting, when specifying the switches other than the small switches, auto switch(s) are mounted on the cylinder.
*5 For rail mounting, the auto switches and auto switch mounting brackets are packed together (not assembled).
*6 For rail mounting, when D-M9mA(V) is ordered separately, select the stainless steel mounting screw set BQ2-012S.
*7 When mounting a band and/or a rail on bore size ø8, ø10 or ø12 cylinder, D-A9l(V) type cannot be mounted.
*8 When mounting a rail on bore size ø20 or ø25 cylinder, D-M9l(V), M9lW(V) and M9lA(V) types cannot be mounted.

Auto Switch Mounting Bracket/Single Unit Part Nos.


Auto switch C85 Series C75 Series
Parts lineup
model ø8 ø10 ø12 ø16 ø20 ø25 ø32 ø40
· Auto switch mounting band (a)
D-M9l(V) BJ2-008 BJ2-010 BJ2-012 BJ2-016 BM2-020A BM2-025A BM2-032A BM2-040A
· Auto switch mounting screw (b)
D-M9lW(V)
D-A9l(V) · Switch holder (c)
BJ5-2 BJ5-1
· Switch bracket (d)
· Auto switch mounting band (a)
BJ2-008S BJ2-010S BJ2-012S BJ2-016S BM2-020AS BM2-025AS BM2-032AS BM2-040AS
· Auto switch mounting screw (b)
D-M9lA(V)
· Switch holder (c)
BJ4-2 BJ4-1
· Switch bracket (e)
[Stainless Steel Mounting Screw]
The following stainless steel mounting screw kit is available. Use it in accordance with the operating environment. (Since the auto switch mounting bracket is not
included, order it separately.)
BBA4: For D-C7/C8/H7 types
* Refer to the Web Catalog or Best Pneumatics for details on the BBA4.
When the D-H7BA type auto switch is shipped independently, the BBA4 is attached.

Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches are mountable.
Refer to Best Pneumatics for the detailed specifications.
Type Model Electrical entry Features Mounting Applicable bore size
D-C73, C76 —
Reed Grommet (In-line) Band ø8 to ø25
D-C80 Without indicator light
D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B —
Solid state Grommet (In-line) Band ø8 to ø25
D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-color indicator)
* Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H) are also available. For details, refer to Best Pneumatics.
* With pre-wired connector is also available for solid state switches. For details, refer to Best Pneumatics.

115
C85/C75 Series
How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch

Mounting Bracket Band Mounting Type


<Applicable auto switch> Caution

C85
Solid state····D-M9N, M9P, M9B, M9NV, M9PV, M9BV
1. Tighten screws with the proper tightening torque.
D-M9NW, M9PW, M9BW, M9NWV, M9PWV, M9BWV

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


2. Set the auto switch mounting band perpendicularly to cylinder tube.
D-M9NA, M9PA, M9BA, M9NAV, M9PAV, M9BAV
Reed············· D-A90, A93, A96, A90V, A93V, A96V
L How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
Mounting correctly Mounting incorrectly
Mounting the Auto Switch c
1. Mount the auto switch mounting band around the auto switch setting Switch bracket
y, u
position on the cylinder tube. (Resin)
2. Place the switch holder in the opening of the auto switch mounting band (1).
3. Make the concave part of the switch bracket faced downward and set the d
e
switch bracket on the switch holder (2). Switch holder
Set the switch bracket so that both ends of the auto switch mounting band (Zinc)
enter the portion between the ribs on both side surfaces of the switch bracket.
For the D-M9lA(V) type auto switch, do not install the switch bracket on the w
indicator light. For BM5
4. Pass the auto switch mounting screw (M3) supplied with the auto
switch mounting band from the through-hole side of the auto switch
mounting band and engage it with the M3 female thread of the auto
switch mounting band through the through-hole in the switch bracket.

C75
q
5. Tighten the auto switch mounting screw with the specified tightening
torque to secure the switch bracket and switch holder.
For BJ6

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Tightening torque for auto switch mounting screw [N·m] a
b
Bore size [mm] Auto switch r, t
Cylinder series Auto switch
ø8 to ø16 ø20 to ø40 mounting band
mounting screw
C85/C75 0.8 to 1.0 0.6 to 0.7
<Switch bracket>
6. Insert the auto switch into the auto switch mounting groove of the switch holder (2).
7. After checking the detection position, tighten the set screw (M2.5)
supplied with the auto switch to secure the auto switch. Protrusion Protrusion surface upward
At this time, the tightening torque for the set screw (M2.5) supplied with
the auto switch must be 0.05 to 0.1 N·m.
When tightening the set screw supplied with the auto switch, use a 60° to 80°
watchmaker's screw driver with a handle diameter of 5 to 6 mm. Reinforcing
Set the switch bracket with its plates
Adjusting the Auto Switch Position Rib
concave part faced downward.
(1) To make the fine adjustment, loosen the set screw (M2.5) supplied
with the auto switch and slide the auto switch inside the auto switch The switch brackets have different colors.
mouthing groove to adjust the position. For BJ6-006: Transparent blue For BJ6-010/016/BM5-lll: Transparent
(2) To move the auto switch setting position largely, loosen the screw (M3) For BJ6-006S: Black For BJ6-010S/016S/BM5-lllS: White
that secures the auto switch mounting band and slide the auto switch <Precautions on BM5>
together with the switch holder on the cylinder tube to adjust the position. When removing the screw connection part with the auto switch mounting screw after the auto switch mounting band has been
assembled, be careful not to drop the switch bracket, switch holder, auto switch mounting screw, or auto switch mounting band.

<Applicable auto switch> Caution


Solid state···D-H7A1, D-H7A2, D-H7B, D-H7BA
1. Tighten the screw under the specified torque when mounting auto switch.
D-H7C, D-H7NF, D-H7NW, D-H7PW, D-H7BW 2. Set the auto switch mounting band perpendicularly to cylinder tube.
Reed············· D-C73, D-C76, D-C80, D-C73C, D-C80C
C96
L How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch
1. Put a mounting band on the cylinder tube and set it at the auto switch
C96Y C96K

mounting position. Mounting correctly Mounting incorrectly


2. P ut the mounting section of the auto switch between the band mounting holes,
then adjust the position of mounting holes of switch to those of mounting band.
3. Lightly thread the auto switch mounting screw (M3) through the mounting
hole into the thread part of band fitting. Auto switch
4. A fter setting the whole body to the detecting position by sliding, tighten the mounting Auto switch
screw (M3) to secure the auto switch while properly contacting the auto switch bottom Auto switch
C55

Auto switch
part and the cylinder tube. (The tightening torque of M3 screw should be as below.) mounting screw mounting screw
ø8 to ø16: 0.8 to 1.0 N·m M3 x 0.5 x 15 L M3 x 0.5 x 15 L

ø20 to ø40: 0.6 to 1.0 N·m Auto switch


5. Modification of the detection position should be made in the condition of 3. mounting bracket
6. After auto switch is mounted and fixed, attach a protective tube on the
Products Order Switch

Auto switch mounting band


Related Made to Auto

tip of an auto switch mounting screw (M3). (For ø8 to ø16) (with bracket)

[Stainless Steel Mounting Screw]


The following stainless steel mounting screw kit is available. Use it in accordance with the operating
environment. (Since the auto switch mounting band is not included, order it separately.)  BBA4: For D-C7/C8/H7
“D-H7BA” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when shipped. When only an auto switch is shipped independently, the BBA4 is attached.
Stainless Steel Mounting Screw Set
Contents Applicable
Part no. Applicable auto switch mounting bracket part nos.
Description Size Quantity auto switch
BJ2-008S, BJ2-010S, BJ2-012S, BJ2-016S D-C7, C8
BBA4 Auto switch mounting screw M3 x 0.5 x 15 L 1
BM2-020AS, BM2-025AS, BM2-03AS, BM2-040AS D-H7
116
C85/C75 Series

Mounting Bracket Rail Mounting Type


<Applicable auto switch>
Solid state······ D-M9N(V), D-M9P(V), D-M9B(V),
D-M9NW(V), D-M9PW(V), D-M9BW(V),
D-M9NA(V), D-M9PA(V), D-M9BA(V)
Set screw
Reed··············· D-A90(V), A93(V), A96(V) Auto switch Auto switch
(Unused)
mounting screw e
1. Slide the auto switch mounting nut inserted into the mounting rail M3 x 0.5 x 8 L
and set it at the auto switch mounting position. (Attached to the cylinder) y
r
2. Fit the convex part of the auto switch mounting bracket arm over a
the concave part of the rail, and slide the arm to the nut position. Auto switch mounting bracket
w
t b
3. Push the auto switch mounting screw lightly into the hexagon nut
Auto switch
through the hole of the auto switch mounting arm. mounting screw
4. Remove the set screw (M2.5) attached to the auto switch. M2.5 x 0.45 x 6 L
5. Insert the auto switch in the auto switch attachment part of the auto
switch mounting bracket. q
6. Secure the auto switch mounting screw (M2.5). (Tightening torque
of M2.5 screw: 0.1 to 0.2 N·m)
7. Secure the auto switch mounting screw (3) (M3) after confirming
Cylinder
the detecting position. (Tightening torque of M3 screw: 0.5 to 0.7
N·m)
8. Modify the detecting position while the auto switch is secured at • BQ2-012 is a set of a and b shown above.
the position of (3) in the figure.

<Applicable auto switch>


Solid state······ D-F79, D-F7P, D-J79, D-F7NV,
D-F7PV, D-F7BV, D-J79C,
D-F79W, D-F7PW, D-J79W,
D-F7NWV, D-F7BWV, D-F79F,
D-F7BA, D-F7BAV,
Reed··············· D-A72, D-A73, D-A80,
Auto switch mounting screw
D-A72H, D-A73H,
(M3 x 0.5 x 8 L)
D-A76H, D-A80H,
D-A73C, D-A80C, D-A79W

L How to Mount and Move the Auto Switch Auto switch


1. Slide the auto switch mounting nut (M3) inserted into the mounting
rail and set it at the auto switch mounting position.
2. Fit the convex part of auto switch mounting arm into the concave part Auto switch mounting nut
of auto switch mounting rail. Then slide the switch over the nut. (M3)
3. Push the auto switch mounting screw (M3) lightly into the mounting
nut (M3) through the hole of auto switch mounting arm.
Auto switch mounting rail
4. After reconfirming the detecting position, tighten the mounting screw
(M3) to secure the auto switch. (Tightening torque of M3 screw
should be 0.5 to 0.7 N·m.)
5. Modification of the detecting position should be made in the condition
of 3.

[Stainless Steel Mounting Screw]


The following stainless steel mounting screw kit (including nuts) is available. Use it in accordance with the operating environment. (Since the
auto switch spacer is not included, order it separately.)
BBA2: For D-A7/A8/F7/J7
“D-F7BA” auto switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when shipped.
When only an auto switch is shipped independently, the BBA2 is attached.
Stainless Steel Mounting Screw Set
Contents Applicable auto switch mounting
Part no. Applicable auto switch
No. Description Size Quantity bracket part nos.
M3 x 0.5 x 6 L 1 BMU1-025
1 Auto switch mounting screw M3 x 0.5 x 8 L 1 BQ-1
D-A7, A8
BBA2 M3 x 0.5 x 10 L 1 BQ-2
D-F7, J7
2 Auto switch mounting nut (Hexagon nut) M3 x 0.5 1 BQ-1
3 Auto switch mounting nut (Convex shape) M3 x 0.5 1 BQ-2
* A spacer for BQ-2 (black resin) is not included.
* When using D-A9l(V)/M9l(V)/M9lW(V)/M9lA(V) auto switches with BQ2-012, use stainless steel screws suitable for the auto switch mounting bracket.

117
Prior to Use
Auto Switch Connections and Examples
Sink Input Specifications Source Input Specifications
3-wire, NPN 3-wire, PNP
Brown Input Brown Input

C85
Black Black
Auto switch Auto switch

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Blue Blue
COM COM
(PLC internal circuit) (PLC internal circuit)

2-wire 2-wire
Brown Input Brown COM

Auto switch Auto switch


Blue Blue
COM Input
(PLC internal circuit) (PLC internal circuit)

Connect according to the applicable PLC input specifications, as the connection method will vary depending on the PLC input specifications.

Examples of AND (Series) and OR (Parallel) Connections


* When using solid state auto switches, ensure the application is set up so the signals for the first 50 ms are invalid.

C75
3-wire AND connection for NPN output 3-wire OR connection for NPN output
(Using relays) (Performed with auto switches only)

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Brown Brown Brown
Relay
Load
Black Black Load Black Load
Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1
Blue Blue Blue

Brown Brown Brown

Black Black Black


Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2
Blue Blue Blue

3-wire AND connection for PNP output 3-wire OR connection for PNP output
(Using relays)
(Performed with auto switches only)
Brown Brown Brown
Relay
Black Black Black
Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1
Blue Blue Blue

Brown Brown Brown

Black Black Load Black Load


C96
Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2
Blue Load Blue Blue
C96Y C96K

2-wire AND connection 2-wire OR connection


Brown When two auto switches are Brown
connected in series, a load (Solid state) (Reed)
Load may malfunction because Load When two auto Because there is no
Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1
C55

the load voltage will decline switches are current leakage, the load
Blue when in the ON state. Blue connected in parallel, voltage will not increase
The indicator lights will light malfunction may occur when turned OFF.
Brown up when both of the auto Brown because the load However, depending on
switches are in the ON state. voltage will increase the number of auto
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

Auto switches with a load when in the OFF state. switches in the ON state,
Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2
voltage less than 20 V the indicator lights may
Blue cannot be used. Blue sometimes grow dim or
not light up, due to the
Load voltage at ON = Power supply voltage – Load voltage at OFF = Leakage current x 2 pcs. x dispersion and reduction
Residual voltage x 2 pcs. Load impedance of the current flowing to
= 24 V − 4 V x 2 pcs. = 1 mA x 2 pcs. x 3 kW the auto switches.
= 16 V =6V
Example: Power supply is 24 VDC Example: Load impedance is 3 kW.
Internal voltage drop in auto switch is 4 V. Leakage current from auto switch is 1 mA.

118
C85/C75 Series
Simple Specials/Made to Order
Please contact SMC for detailed specifications, delivery, and prices.

The following special specifications can be ordered as a simplified Made-to-Order.


L Simple Specials Please contact your local sales representative for more details.
C85 C85K
(Standard) (Not-rotating rod)
Symbol Specifications Double acting
Single Double Single
acting acting acting
Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod
Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber Rubber

-XA0 to 30 Change of rod end shape*1

L Made to Order
C85 C85K
(Standard) (Not-rotating rod)
Symbol Specifications Double acting
Single Double Single
acting acting acting
Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod
Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber Rubber

-XB6 Heat-resistant cylinder (–10 to 150°C)*2

-XB7 Cold-resistant cylinder (–40 to 70°C)*3

-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)*3

-XC4 With heavy duty scraper*3

-XC6l Made of stainless steel


*1 Excludes the ø8 air cushion
*2 Rubber bumper ø10 to ø40 only
*3 Rubber bumper ø20, ø25, ø32 and ø40 only
*4 For front mounting, only the ø20 and ø25 are available.
*5 For XB6, XB7 and XB9, only the ø20 and ø25 are available.

A 119
Simple Specials/Made to Order C85/C75 Series

C85R C75 C75K C75R


(Direct mount)*4 (Standard) (Not-rotating rod) (Direct mount)

C85
Double acting Double acting Single Double Single Double acting Double acting Symbol Page
Double acting
(Bottom side mounting) (Front side mounting) acting acting acting (Bottom side mounting) (Front side mounting)
Single rod Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod Single rod

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Rubber Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Rubber

-XA0 to 30 121

C85R C75 C75K C75R


(Direct mount)*4 (Standard) (Not-rotating rod) (Direct mount)
Double acting Double acting
Double acting
Single Double Single Double acting Double acting Symbol Page
(Bottom side mounting) (Front side mounting) acting acting acting (Bottom side mounting) (Front side mounting)
Single rod Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod Single rod
Rubber Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Rubber

-XB6 123

-XB7 123

-XB9 124

C75
-XC4 124

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


-XC6l 124

C96
C96Y C96K
C55
Products Order Switch
Related Made to Auto

120
C85/C75 Series
Simple Specials
For details, refer to the Simple Specials
in the Web Catalog.
http://www.smcworld.com
The following changes are dealt with through the Simple Specials System.

Symbol
1 Change of Rod End Shape -XA0 to XA30
Applicable Series
Series Description Model Action Note
C85 Double acting, Single rod Excludes the ø8 air cushion
Standard C85W Double acting, Double rod Excludes the ø8 air cushion
C85 Single acting (Spring return/extend)
C85
C85K Double acting, Single rod
Non-rotating rod
C85K Single acting (Spring return/extend)
Direct mount C85R Double acting, Single rod For front mounting, only the ø20 and ø25 are available.
C75 Double acting, Single rod
Standard C75W Double acting, Double rod
C75 Single acting (Spring return/extend)
C75
C75K Double acting, Single rod
Non-rotating rod
C75K Single acting (Spring return/extend)
Direct mount C75R Double acting, Single rod

Precautions
1. SMC will make appropriate arrangements if no dimension, tolerance, or 3. In the case of the double rod type and single acting retraction type,
finish instructions are given in the diagram. enter the dimensions when the rod is retracted.
2. Standard dimensions marked with “∗” will be as follows to the rod 4. “A0” is the same shape as the standard type. (The specifications of A0
diameter (D). Enter any special dimension you require. are that only dimensions A and H are changed from the standard type.)
D ≤ 6  D−1 mm, 6 < D ≤ 25  D−2 mm, D > 25  D−4 mm

Symbol: A0 Symbol: A1 Symbol: A2 Symbol: A3

C C0.5 øDA
30° 30°

A T W1
H H H
H

Symbol: A4 Symbol: A5 Symbol: A6 Symbol: A7

øRD øRD B MM AL MM AL
30°


L 30° 30° 30°


H W L
H H
H

Symbol: A8 Symbol: A9 Symbol: A10 Symbol: A11

≈C0.5 file chamfer


B AL WA
C R sphere
MM R sphere TP
øDC

30°
T W1 H
H H
H

121
Simple Specials C85/C75 Series

Symbol: A12 Symbol: A13 Symbol: A14 Symbol: A15

C85
C0.5 øDA AL øDA
C øDA 30° MM C øDA 30°

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


R sphere 30°


T W1 A A A
C
H H H H

Symbol: A16 Symbol: A17 Symbol: A18 Symbol: A19

AL øDA
MM 30° MM 30° MM 30° MM 30°

C75
C A A A A
H H H H

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Symbol: A20 Symbol: A21 Symbol: A22 Symbol: A23
øDA

30° 30° øRD


30° MM
øDA

MM MM 30°
L
øDB

øDB


T T C B
A LK
A A A
H W
H H H

Symbol: A24 Symbol: A25 Symbol: A26 Symbol: A27

øDA
MM MM 30°
MM ∗ 30°
MM ∗ øDA

C96
A L A
AL AL LK AL LB K H
H
C96Y C96K

H H

Symbol: A28 Symbol: A29 Symbol: A30


C55

30° 30° 30°


MM ∗ øDA W L MM
W

Products Order Switch


Related Made to Auto

A T AL T
L A A
H MM H
H

122
C85/C75 Series
Made to Order
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.

Symbol
1 Heat-resistant Cylinder (–10 to 150°C) -XB6
Air cylinder which changed the seal material and grease, so that it could be used even at higher temperature up to 150 from –10°C.

Applicable Series Specifications


Series Description Model Action Note Ambient temperature range –10°C to 150°C
Double acting, Rubber bumper ø10 to ø25 only Seal material Fluororubber
C85 Single rod Excludes with rod end (Accessory)
Standard Grease Heat-resistant grease
Double acting, Rubber bumper
C85 C85W Double rod Auto switch Not mountable*1
ø10 to ø25 only
Dimensions Same as standard
Double acting, ø20, ø25 only
Direct mount C85R
Single rod Excludes with rod end (Accessory) Specifications other than above Same as standard
Double acting, Rubber bumper only *1 Manufacturing built-in magnet type and the one with auto switch is
C75 Single rod Excludes with rod end (Accessory)
Standard impossible.
Double acting,
C75 C75W Double rod Rubber bumper only
Warning
Double acting, Excludes with rod end
Direct mount C75R
Single rod (Accessory) Precautions
* Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator. Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into
* Please contact SMC for details on the maintenance intervals for this contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
cylinder, which differ from those of the standard cylinder. hazardous to humans.
* In principle, it is impossible to make built-in magnet type and the one
with auto switch. But, as for the one with auto switch, and the heat-
resistant cylinder with heat-resistant auto switch, please contact SMC.
* Piston speed is ranged from 50 to 500 mm/s.

How to Order
Standard model no. XB6
Heat-resistant cylinder

Symbol
2 Cold-resistant Cylinder (–40 to 70°C) -XB7
Air cylinder which changed the seal material and grease, so that it could be used even at lower temperature down to –40°C.

Applicable Series Specifications


Series Description Model Action Note Ambient temperature range –40°C to 70°C
Double acting, Rubber bumper ø20 and ø25 only Seal material Low nitrile rubber
C85 Single rod Excludes with rod end (Accessory)
Standard Grease Cold-resistant grease
Double acting, Rubber bumper
C85 C85W Double rod Auto switch Not mountable*1
ø20 and ø25 only
Dimensions Same as standard
Double acting, ø20, ø25 only
Direct mount C85R
Single rod Excludes with rod end (Accessory) Specifications other than above Same as standard
Double acting, Rubber bumper only *1 M
 anufacturing built-in magnet type and the one with auto switch is
C75 Single rod Excludes with rod end (Accessory)
Standard impossible.
Double acting,
C75 C75W Double rod Rubber bumper only
Warning
Double acting, Excludes with rod end
Direct mount C75R Precautions
Single rod (Accessory)
* O perate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator. Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into
* Use dry air which is suitable for heatless air dryer etc. not to cause the contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
moisture to be frozen. hazardous to humans.
* Please contact SMC for details on the maintenance intervals for this
cylinder, which differ from those of the standard cylinder.
* Manufacturing built-in magnet type and mounting an auto switch are
impossible.
* No cushion type is adopted. Piston speed is ranged from 50 to 500 mm/s.

How to Order
Standard model no. XB7
Cold-resistant cylinder

A 123
Made to Order C85/C75 Series

Symbol
3 Low Speed Cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s) -XB9
Even if driving at lower speeds 10 to 50 mm/s, there would be no stick-slip phenomenon and it can run smoothly.

Applicable Series Specifications

C85
Series Description Model Action Note Piston speed 10 to 50 mm/s
Double acting, Rubber bumper Dimensions Same as standard
Standard C85

C85R C85K-S/T C85K C85-S/T C85W


Single rod ø20 and ø25 only
C85 Specifications other than above Same as standard
Double acting,
Direct mount C85R Single rod ø20, ø25 only
* Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator.
Double acting,
Standard C75 Rubber bumper only
C75
Single rod Warning
Direct mount
Double acting,
C75R Single rod Precautions
Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into
contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
How to Order hazardous to humans.
Standard model no. XB9
Low speed cylinder

Symbol
4 With Heavy Duty Scraper -XC4

C75
It is suitable for using cylinders under the environment, where there are much dusts in a surrounding area by using a heavy duty scraper on the
wiper ring, or using cylinders under earth and sand exposed to the die-casted equipment, construction machinery, or industrial vehicles.

CP96K CP96 C75R C75K-S/T C75K C75-S/T C75W


Applicable Series Specifications: Same as standard
Series Description Model Action Note

C85
Double acting, Rubber bumper Caution
Single rod ø20 to ø25 only Either heavy duty scraper or rod seal cannot be replaced.
C85 Standard
Double acting, Rubber bumper
C85W Double rod ø20 to ø25 only
Double acting, Construction (Dimensions are the same as standard.)
C75 Standard C75 Single rod
Rubber bumper only

Heavy duty scraper


How to Order
Standard model no. XC4
With heavy duty scraper

Symbol
5 Made of Stainless Steel -XC6l
Suitable for the cases it is likely to generate rust by being immersed in the water and corrosion.
C96
Applicable Series Specifications
Series Description Model Action Note Parts changed to stainless steel Piston rod, Rod end nut
C96Y C96K

C85 Double acting, Single rod


Standard C85W Double acting, Double rod Specifications other than above
Same as standard
and external dimensions
C85 Single acting (Spring return/extend)
C85
C85K Double acting, Single rod Bore size [mm]
Non-rotating rod Description
C85K Single acting (Spring return/extend)
8 10 12 16 20 25
Direct mount C85R Double acting, Single rod XC6A only Rod end nut C85NT08A-S C85NT08A-S C85NT10A-S C85NT10A-S C85NT20A-S C85NT25A-S
C55

C75 Double acting, Single rod Mounting nut C85NT08B-S C85NT08B-S C85NT10B-S C85NT10B-S C85NT20B-S C85NT20B-S
Standard C75W Double acting, Double rod
C75
C75 Single acting (Spring return/extend) Bore size [mm]
Description
Direct mount C75R Double acting, Single rod XC6A only 32 40
Products Order Switch

Rod end nut C76NT32A-S C76NT40A-S


Related Made to Auto

How to Order Mounting nut C76NT32B-S C76NT40B-S

Standard model no. XC6 A


Made of stainless steel

Parts changed to stainless steel


A Piston rod, Rod end nut
B Piston rod, Rod end nut, Mounting nut
124

You might also like

pFad - Phonifier reborn

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.


Alternative Proxies:

Alternative Proxy

pFad Proxy

pFad v3 Proxy

pFad v4 Proxy